JP2017093771A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of preferably enhancing an attention degree to a game.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: operation means 26 which can be operated by a player; normal performance means 310-330 comprising movable parts 311-331 capable of moving between a first position and a second position; valid period determination means for determining a valid period of the operation means 26; and specific timing determination means for determining a specific timing in the valid period. When the player operates the operation means 26, and when a prescribed condition is established, the normal performance means 310-330 are moved so that movement of the normal performance means 310-330 is finished at the specific timing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player smoothly pay attention to other performance which is started on and after the specific timing, so that an attention degree to a game of the player can be improved.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 14

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a button (operation means) that can be operated by a player and a movable portion that can move based on the player's button operation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In such a gaming machine, the player can participate in the game by operating the button, so that the player's attention to the game can be increased.

JP 2014-128522 A

  In such a gaming machine, it is desired to improve a player's attention to the game well by devising a method of controlling the movable part.

  In view of the above points, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

  In order to achieve the above object, according to the first aspect of the present invention, there is provided an operation means operable by the player, an operation detection means for detecting whether or not the operation means is operated, and a first position different from the first position. Based on the detection result of the operation detecting means, the normal effect means control means for controlling the normal effect means based on the detection result of the operation detection means, and the effective period of the operation means is determined. An effective period determining means that includes a specific timing determining means for determining a specific timing within the effective period when it is determined that a predetermined first condition is satisfied, and a normal effect means control means When it is determined that the operating means has been operated within the effective period and it is determined that the specific timing has been determined, if it is determined that the predetermined second condition is satisfied, As movable normal effect means terminates at, it is characterized in that is movable normal representation section.

  According to this, when the specific timing is determined, when the normal performance means determines that the second condition is satisfied, the normal performance means moves the normal performance means so that the movement of the normal performance means ends at the specific timing. For this reason, in such a situation, the normal effect means does not move after the specific timing, so that the player can smoothly focus on another effect that starts after the specific timing, and the player's degree of attention to the game Can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main component parts of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main component parts of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the main components of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the structure of a 1st effect unit, a 2nd effect unit, a 3rd effect unit, and a specific unit. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the movable aspect of a 1st production unit. It is a schematic diagram showing a state when the first effect unit, the second effect unit, and the third effect unit move to the second position and the specific unit moves to the fourth position. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the whole electrical structure in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which mainly shows the electric constitution of a main controller. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical structure of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus and a display control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success / failure lottery. It is a figure which shows the structure of a 1st reservation area. It is a figure for demonstrating the special symbol success / failure table storage area, (a) shows the special symbol success / failure table for low probability modes, (b) shows the special symbol success / failure table for high probability modes. It is a figure for demonstrating a distribution table storage area, (a) shows the distribution table (1st distribution information group) for 1st result display parts, (b) is for 2nd result display parts. The distribution table (second distribution information group) is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the pending | holding information performed in main side MPU. It is a figure for demonstrating a special figure special electricity address table. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electricity start process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for rounds performed with the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power release process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power closing process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power completion | finish process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the usual figure normal power control process performed in main side MPU. It is a figure for demonstrating a general-purpose ordinary telephone address table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for demonstration display performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in audio | voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command corresponding | compatible process performed in audio | voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command response process following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed by display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding | compatible process performed by display side MPU. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the data table for patterns by which the display which prompts a player to operate an effect unit is displayed. It is a flowchart which shows the separate response | compatibility process performed with display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task process performed in display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the command setting process performed in display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display side command corresponding | compatible process performed in audio | voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st frame button corresponding | compatible process performed in audio | voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the specific unit movable lottery process performed in audio | voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation unit movable process performed in audio | voice side MPU. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the display mode of a special symbol, the production unit operation effective period, and the display mode of a symbol display device. It is a timing chart which shows the state of an effect unit operation effective period, the state of a 1st frame button, the 1st effect unit, the 2nd effect unit, the 3rd effect unit, and a specific unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the movable aspect of a 1st-3rd production unit and a specific unit, (a) shows the movable aspect of the 1st-3rd production unit and specific unit in time T4, (b) is in time T41b. The movable aspects of the first to third effect units and the specific unit are shown, (c) shows the movable aspects of the first to third effect units and the specific unit at time T41d, and (d) is the first to first effects at time T41f. 3 shows the movable aspects of the three effect units and the specific unit, (e) shows the movable aspects of the first to third effect units and the specific unit at time T41h, and (f) shows the first to third effect units at the time T41j and The movable aspect of the specific unit is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation unit movable process which the audio | voice side MPU in 2nd Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a timing chart which shows the production unit operation effective period, the state of the 1st frame button, the 1st production unit, the 2nd production unit, and the 3rd production unit in the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation unit movable process which the audio | voice side MPU in the modification of 2nd Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a figure which shows the electrical structure of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus and the display control apparatus mainly in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation unit movable process which the audio | voice side MPU in 3rd Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation unit movable process which the audio | voice side MPU in 4th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a figure which shows the electrical structure of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus and the display control apparatus mainly in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st frame button corresponding | compatible process which the audio | voice side MPU in 5th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a timing chart which shows the state of the production unit operation effective period, the state of the 1st frame button, the 1st production unit, the 2nd production unit, the 3rd production unit, and the specific unit in a 5th embodiment of the present invention. The model which shows the state when the 1st production unit in the modification of 5th Embodiment of this invention, the 2nd production unit, and the 3rd production unit move to the 2nd position, and the specific unit moved to the 4th position. FIG. It is a figure which shows the electrical structure of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus and the display control apparatus mainly in 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which the audio | voice side MPU in 6th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a flowchart which shows the specific unit preliminary process which the audio | voice side MPU in 6th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st frame button corresponding | compatible process which the audio | voice side MPU in 6th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation unit special movable process which the audio | voice side MPU in 6th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a timing chart which shows the state of the production unit operation effective period, the state of the 1st frame button, the 1st production unit, the 2nd production unit, the 3rd production unit, and the specific unit in a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st frame button corresponding | compatible process which the audio | voice side MPU in the modification of 6th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which the audio | voice side MPU in the modification of 6th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a flowchart which shows the specific unit preliminary process which the audio | voice side MPU in 7th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st frame button corresponding | compatible process which the audio | voice side MPU in 7th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a flowchart which shows the specific unit movable lottery process which the audio | voice side MPU in 7th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation unit special movable process which the audio | voice side MPU in 8th Embodiment of this invention performs. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an effect unit special movement process following FIG. 74. It is a timing chart which shows the state of the production unit operation effective period, the state of the 1st frame button, the 1st production unit, the 2nd production unit, the 3rd production unit, and the specific unit in the 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the electrical structure of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus and the display control apparatus mainly in 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation unit special movable process which the audio | voice side MPU in 9th Embodiment of this invention performs. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an effect unit special movement process following FIG. 78. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which the audio | voice side MPU in 9th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a flowchart which shows the production | production unit standby cancellation | release process which the audio | voice side MPU in 9th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a timing chart which shows the state of the production unit operation effective period in the 9th embodiment of the present invention, the state of the 1st frame button, the 1st production unit, the 2nd production unit, the 3rd production unit, and the specific unit. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation unit movable process which the audio | voice side MPU in 10th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which the audio | voice side MPU in 10th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a flowchart which shows the specific unit corresponding | compatible process which the audio | voice side MPU in 10th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st frame button corresponding | compatible process which the audio | voice side MPU in 10th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a timing chart which shows the state of the production unit operation effective period, the state of the 1st frame button, the 1st production unit, the 2nd production unit, the 3rd production unit, and the specific unit in a 10th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the electrical structure of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus and the display control apparatus mainly in 11th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which the audio | voice side MPU in 11th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation unit movable process which the audio | voice side MPU in 11th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a flowchart which shows the prescription | regulation operation frequency corresponding | compatible process which the audio | voice side MPU in 11th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a timing chart which shows the effect unit operation effective period, the state of the 1st frame button, the 1st effect unit, the 2nd effect unit, and the 3rd effect unit in the 11th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the electrical structure of the whole pachinko machine in other embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the structure of the 1st effect unit in the other embodiment of this invention, the 2nd effect unit, the 3rd effect unit, and the specific unit. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the movable aspect of the 1st effect unit in other embodiment of this invention.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following embodiments, parts that are the same or equivalent to each other will be described with the same reference numerals.

(First embodiment)
An example in which the first embodiment of the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a pachinko machine) 10 which is a kind of gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views in which main components of the pachinko machine 10 are developed, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing main components of the pachinko machine 10. 5 is a front view of the game board 43 in the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. 11 and a gaming machine main body 12 that is pivotably attached to the front. The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plate members to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility in the game hall.

  2 and 3, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit disposed behind the inner frame 13. 15. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable (openable / closable) with respect to the outer frame 11.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 has the left side (fixed end side on one end side with respect to the rotation center) as the rotation base end side and the right side (others with respect to the rotation center) as viewed from the front. It is supported by the inner frame 13 so as to be able to rotate forward with the open end side on the end side as the rotation tip side. As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is supported by the inner frame 13 so that the left side is a rotation base end side and the right side is a rotation front end side and can be rotated rearward in a front view. Yes.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the gaming machine main body 12 has a locked state in which the gaming machine main body 12 cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11 on the front end side of the front door frame. A locking device 16 having a function of bringing 14 into a locked state that cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13 is provided. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 (see FIG. 1) provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the front door frame 14 is configured by assembling decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 21 opened in a substantially rectangular shape at a substantially central portion. It has been. A window panel 22 having two glass plates that are colorless and transparent is disposed on the back side of the front door frame 14, and a front surface (game area) of a game board 43 to be described later is connected to the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22. It is visible from the front side. Note that the window panel 22 may be formed of a synthetic resin so as to be colorless and transparent instead of the plate glass.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, the front door frame 14 includes an upper bulging portion 23 and a lower bulging portion 24 that are projected below the window portion 21 and projecting forward of the front door frame 14. Are lined up and down. As shown in FIG. 4, an upper plate 25 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 23, so that a game ball can be stored in the upper plate 25. Further, the upper plate 25 is formed so that the bottom surface of the opening portion is inclined downward toward the right side of the front view (see FIGS. 1 and 4), and is placed (stored) in the upper plate 25 by the inclination. ) It has a function of guiding the ball to a game ball launching mechanism 44 described later.

  Further, the upper bulging portion 23 is provided with a first frame button 26 (operation means) at a substantially central portion of an upper surface (a portion of the upper surface that is not opened). A second frame button 27 (operation means) is provided on the right side of the view. The first frame button 26 is operated when changing the stage (background) to be displayed or changing (adding) the notice effect (conversation effect or character effect) to be displayed on the symbol display device 80 to be described later. Is done. Further, in this embodiment, as will be described later, a super reach is mounted as one effect of the game times, and the first frame button 26 is operated by the player during a predetermined super reach. The second frame button 27 is operated by the player when changing the volume, light amount, or the like controlled by an audio lamp control device 92 described later. In the pachinko machine 10, the first frame button 26 has a substantially circular shape when viewed from above, and the second frame button 27 has a substantially cross shape when viewed from above, but the shape of the first frame button 26 and the second frame button 27 Can be appropriately changed.

  The stage is a production (background) mode that provides uniformity in the production displayed on the symbol display device 80. In the pachinko machine 10, the “underwater stage”, “beach stage”, “city stage” 3 stages are provided. Various effects such as reach effects, which will be described later, are set to be effects that match the theme corresponding to each stage. The stage is changed by the player operating the first frame button 26 during a period when the variable display is not performed on the symbol display device 80 (main display unit 71) to be described later and during a predetermined period when the variable display is performed. When the first frame button 26 is operated, it is repeatedly changed in the order of “underwater stage” → “beach stage” → “city stage” → “underwater stage”.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the upper bulging portion 23 is provided with a ball lending button 28 and a return button 29 on the right side in front of the second frame button 27. Thereby, in the game hall or the like, when the ball lending button 28 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, according to the operation. Rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 29 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. However, the ball lending button 28 and the return button 29 are unnecessary in a pachinko machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 25 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, so-called cash machine. In this case, a decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball lending button 28 and the return button 29 to make the parts configuration common. Thereby, the common use of the pachinko machine (CR machine) and cash machine using a card unit can be aimed at.

  Inside the lower bulging portion 24, there is provided a lower plate 30 that opens upward similarly to the upper plate 25 and stores balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 25. Note that game balls paid out from a payout device 99 provided on the back pack unit 15 to be described later are discharged to the upper plate 25 and the lower plate 30 through a discharge passage provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14. .

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, an operation handle 31 that is operated by a player to drive a game ball into the front surface of a game board 43 described later is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 30 as viewed from the front. . Inside the operation handle 31, there is a touch sensor 31a for detecting that the operation handle 31 is touched by a player, and even if the player is rotating the operation handle 31, the game ball A push button type stop switch 31b for stopping the firing (see FIG. 1) and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 31 by a change in electric resistance are incorporated. When the operation handle 31 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 31a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount. The game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes in accordance with the game value, so that the game ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 43, which will be described later, with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 31 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 31a and the stop switch 31b are off.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a ball removal lever 32 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower plate 30 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 30 downward. The ball release lever 32 is normally arranged in the right direction. When the ball release lever 32 is slid to the left, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 30 opens, and the game ball naturally falls from the bottom opening. Discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 32 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 30 is placed below the lower plate 30.

  In addition, the front door frame 14 is provided with an electrical decoration portion 33 that incorporates light emitting means such as an LED around the window portion 21, and a pair of speaker portions 34 at both left and right end portions above the window portion 21. Is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, at the time of hitting or at the time of reach production, each lighting unit 33 is lit or blinking to notify that it is hitting or reaching, and the speaker unit 34. It is configured to enhance the effect of the game during the game by notifying the player that the player is hitting or reaching. Moreover, the electrical decoration part 33 also exhibits the function as an error lamp which blinks when an error occurs. Further, in the present pachinko machine 10, a plated member 35 made of ABS resin with chrome plating is attached to the area around the electric decoration part 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 41 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole is formed in the center of the resin base 41. 42 is formed. A game board 43 shown in FIG. 5 is detachably attached to the resin base 41, and a game ball launching mechanism 44 that launches a game ball onto the front area of the game board 43 is disposed. The game ball launching mechanism 44 is attached below the window hole 42 in the resin base 41, and a launch rail 45 extending toward a guide rail described later, and a game ball stored in the upper plate 25 on the launch rail 45. And a launching solenoid 47 which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied on the firing rail 45 toward the guide rail. Then, by operating the operation handle 31 provided on the front door frame 14, the launch solenoid 47 is driven and controlled, and a game ball is launched.

  Here, the configuration of the game board 43 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. The game board 43 has a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, an inner rail 51, an outer rail 52, a general winning port 53, on the front surface of a base plate 50 formed of a resin material cut into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. A first start opening (first start entrance section) 54, a second start opening (second start entrance section) 55, a variable winning device 56, a normal symbol start gate 57, a variable display unit 58, and the like are assembled. It is configured. The general winning port 53, the first starting port 54, the second starting port 55, the variable winning device 56, the normal symbol starting gate 57, and the variable display device unit 58 are formed in the through holes formed in the base plate 50 by router processing. It is arranged and is fixed from the front side of the game board 43 with wood screws or the like. And such a game board 43 is attached and fixed to the back surface side of the inner frame 13 so that the center part of the front surface can be visually recognized through the window part 21 of the front door frame 14. Yes.

  On the back side of the game board 43, detection sensors 53 a, 54 a, 55 a, corresponding to the general winning port 53, the first starting port 54, the second starting port 55, the variable winning device 56, and the normal symbol starting gate 57, respectively. 56c and 57a (see FIG. 12) are provided. When a ball enters the general winning port 53, the first and second starting ports 54 and 55, the variable winning device 56, and the normal symbol starting gate 57, the corresponding detecting sensor detects the ball and the detection result is It is output to a main controller 91 described later. For example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used as the detection sensor, but any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect the entry of game balls.

  Further, when the occurrence of a ball entering the general winning port 53, the first starting port 54, the second starting port 55, and the variable winning device 56 is detected, a predetermined number of paid balls are paid out based on the detection result. Is done. In the present embodiment, when 10 balls are paid out to the general winning opening 53, 10 game balls are paid out, and 15 balls are thrown into the variable winning device 56. When a payout is executed and a ball enters the first and second start ports 54 and 55, the payout of three game balls is executed. The number of these winning balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of winning balls for entering the first starting port 54 may be larger than the number of winning balls for entering the second starting port 55. . Further, the number of winning balls for entering the variable winning device 56 is not limited to a configuration in which the number of winning balls for entering the variable winning device 56 is larger than the number of other winning balls. It is good also as a structure smaller than the number of prize balls with respect to the entrance into.

  The inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 are formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52, and a game ball launching mechanism The game ball launched from 44 is attached to the base plate 50 so as to be guided to the upper part of the game area. Further, on the front surface of the game board 43, there is disposed a resin connecting member 59 that connects the lower right end portion of the inner rail 51 and the upper right end portion of the outer rail 52 in a front view. Yes. The game area is an area on the front surface of the game board 43 surrounded by the inner rail 51, the outer rail 52, and the connecting member 59, and an area where a game is played by the behavior of the game ball (the game ball that has been launched). Is the area where water flows down).

Further, a return ball preventing member 60 is attached to the front end side (the upper left portion in FIG. 5) of the inner rail 51, and the game ball once launched to the upper portion (game area) of the game board 43 is guided rail (the inner rail 51). And the outer rail 52 can be prevented from returning into the region). Then, a return rubber 61 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 52 (upper right part in FIG. 5) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere.
When hitting 1, the momentum is damped and rebounded toward the center.

  A first start port 54 through which a game ball can enter is disposed in the lower center of the game board 43 when viewed from the front, and a game ball is provided at the lower right side of the game board 43 (right side of the first start port 54). Is provided with a second start port 55 through which the ball can enter. When a game ball enters the first start port 54, the corresponding detection sensor 54a (see FIG. 12) detects the game ball entering. Similarly, when a game ball enters the second starting port 55, the corresponding detection sensor 55a (see FIG. 12) detects the entry of the game ball. Then, the detection result is output to a main control device 91 to be described later, and the main control device 91 determines whether or not a special symbol is hit (determination of whether or not to shift to the opening / closing execution mode), and lottery A display corresponding to the result is displayed on the symbol display device 80 described later.

  In addition, the second starting port 55 is provided with an electric accessory 63. The electric accessory 63 is configured to be openable and closable. When the electric accessory 63 is in a closed state, the game ball does not enter the second start port 55 or is difficult to enter, When the accessory 63 is in the open state, the game ball is easy to enter the second starting port 55.

  The normal symbol start gate (through gate) 57 is provided on the right side of the game board 43 as viewed from the front. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 57, the corresponding detection sensor 57a (see FIG. 12) detects the passage (entrance) of the game ball, and the detection result is output to the main controller 91 described later. Is done. Further, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 57, the main controller 91 described later determines whether or not the normal symbol is hit (determination whether or not the electric accessory 63 is to be opened). If the determination result is a win (winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric accessory open state), the electric accessory driving unit 63a (see FIG. 12) is driven to open the electric accessory 63. Thus, the game ball enters the second start port 55 easily.

  Although specifically described later, in the present embodiment, a high probability mode and a low probability mode are mounted, and in the high probability mode, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased and the electric accessory 63 is easily opened. It has become. For this reason, in the high probability mode (during the high frequency support mode), it is advantageous for the player to pass the normal symbol start gate 57 to open the electric accessory 63, so that the game ball is a symbol. The game ball is fired so as to pass through the right side of the display device 80 (so-called right hit).

The variable winning device 56 is disposed on the lower right side of the game board 43 when viewed from the front, and has a large winning opening 56a that leads to the back side of the gaming board 43, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate 56b that covers the large winning opening 56a, A variable prize driving unit 56d (see FIG. 12) such as a solenoid for driving the opening / closing plate 56b to open / close forward is set about the lower side of the opening / closing plate 56b. The special winning opening 56a is normally closed so that a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. When it is determined that the main control device 91, which will be described later, has won the transition to the opening / closing execution mode (the winning lottery has been won), the variable winning drive unit 56d is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate 56b downward on the front side. Then, an open state in which the game ball easily enters the big winning opening 56a is temporarily formed, and the open state and the normal closed state are alternately repeated. For example, the special winning opening 56a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or 10 game balls are entered). The opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 56 is determined according to the determined winning type. For example, in the case of a 16R probability variation result to be described later, it is repeatedly performed 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a privilege gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). A payout is made. For this reason, during the opening / closing execution mode, the player launches the game ball so that the game ball passes through the right side of the symbol display device 80 and enters the big winning opening 56a (so-called right hit). The opening / closing execution mode refers to a mode that is entered when a lottery regarding the winning of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is won in the main controller 91 described later, and this opening / closing execution mode will be described later. To do.

  A plurality of general winning ports 53 are provided below the game board 43 in a front view. In addition, an out port 66 is provided at the bottom of the front view of the game board 43 so that game balls that have not entered the various winning ports are discharged from the game area through the out port 66. .

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. In the present specification, a game ball entered into the general winning port 53, the first starting port 54, the second starting port 55, and the variable winning device 56 (large winning port 56a) is also expressed as winning.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 43 as viewed from the front, an adhering space 70 for adhering a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided. It can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the 14 window portions 21.

  Further, a main display portion 71 composed of a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means is provided at the lower left corner of the game board 43 as viewed from the front (outside the outer rail 52). The main display portion 71 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14.

  The main display unit 71 is based on the first result display unit 71a indicating the result of the first lottery game performed by the main controller 91 based on the winning at the first starting port 54 and the winning at the second starting port 55. When the variable winning device 56 enters the opening / closing execution mode by winning the winning lottery, the second result display portion 71b showing the result of the second lottery game performed by the main controller 91 (or the opening / closing execution mode). A round display unit 71c indicating the number of times the variable winning device 56 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode.

  Specifically, in the first result display portion 71a, a variable display regarding the first lottery game is performed, and the variable display (flashing) is performed until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the first lottery game has elapsed. After the display), the change display is stopped and displayed in a lighting state indicating the result of the first lottery game. When the lottery result of the first lottery game is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display portion 71a and the variable display is stopped. Later, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the second result display portion 71b, the variable display regarding the second lottery game is performed, and the variable display (flashing display) is performed until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the second lottery game elapses. Thereafter, as a result of stopping the variable display, the display is stopped and displayed in a lighting state indicating the result of the second lottery game. When the lottery result of the second lottery game is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display portion 71b and the variable display is stopped. Later, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, based on the first and second lottery games (winning to either the first or second starting port 54 or 55), the corresponding first and second result display portions 71a and 71b are displayed in a variable manner. The period from the start to the display of a predetermined stop result until the change display is stopped corresponds to one game time (change display time). However, the number of game times is not limited to the above-mentioned contents. For example, a single result display unit is provided, and the single result display unit is provided in both the first and second lottery games. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed, the variable display is started in the single result display unit, and the above-mentioned variable display is stopped in a state where the predetermined stop result is displayed as one game time. To do.

Further, the main display unit 71 includes a display unit 71d in addition to the first and second result display units 71a and 71b and the round display unit 71c. In the other display portion 71d, for example, a variable display is performed in response to a winning at the normal symbol starting gate 57, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery performed based on a winning at the normal symbol starting gate 57 is performed. Results are shown. When the result of the internal lottery triggered by the winning of the normal symbol start gate 57 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the open state of the electric accessory, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the other display portion 71d. After the lighting is displayed, the state shifts to the electric accessory open state. In the electric combination released state, the electric combination 63 is in the open state, and the game ball is likely to win the second starting port 55.

  In addition, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 57 while the variable display with the winning to the normal symbol start gate 57 is performed in the other display portion 71d, the number of passages is a maximum of four in this embodiment. The number of hold times is also displayed. Furthermore, when a game ball wins the first and second start ports 54 and 55 while the variable display is performed on the first result display portion 71a or the second result display portion 71b, the number of wins is determined in this embodiment. Up to four times for the first start port 54 and up to four times for the second start port 55, the number of times of the hold is also displayed.

  The plurality of LEDs constituting the main display unit 71 are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, so that the pachinko machine 10 includes fewer LEDs depending on the combination of the light emission colors. Various gaming states can be suggested. The main display unit 71 may be configured using another display device such as a liquid crystal display device.

  The variable display device unit 58 is disposed in the center of the game board 43. This variable display unit 58 displays the lottery result of the first lottery game by variably displaying the first special symbol while synchronizing with the variation display in the first result display portion 71a, and also varies in the second result display portion 71b. A symbol display device 80 having a display screen 80a for displaying the lottery result of the second lottery game by variably displaying the second special symbol in synchronization with the display, and a center frame 81 disposed so as to surround the symbol display device 80 have. The center frame 81 is installed with the upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen 80a is lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. .

  The symbol display device 80 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display having a size of 17 inches and a substantially rectangular shape. Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first game lottery triggered by the winning at the first starting port 54, and the first triggered by the winning at the second starting port 55. Upper upper display area Dm for displaying the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the two lottery game, and lower lower display area Dn for displaying the holding symbol (the first lottery game and the second lottery game hold) have.

  In the symbol display device 80, the display content of the display screen 80a is controlled by a display control device 93 described later. The symbol display device 80 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

In this pachinko machine 10, the upper display area Dm is displayed variably as the symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle and lower directions, and these symbols are scrolled in the horizontal direction. Then, the variable display on the symbol display device 80 (display screen 80a) is started in response to winning at the first start port 54 or the second start port 55. That is, when variable display is performed on the first result display unit 71a or the second result display unit 71b, variable display is performed on the symbol display device 80 accordingly. Then, in the game times that shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the symbol display device 80 stops and displays a predetermined combination of symbols on the preset effective line.

  The first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed in the upper display area Dm are nine kinds of main symbols with numbers “1” to “9” shown in FIGS. And a sub-pattern consisting of a shell-shaped picture pattern shown in FIG. 7 (j). More specifically, the main symbol is composed of symbols in which numbers “1” to “9” are attached to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  In the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, as shown in FIG. 6, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the upper, middle, and lower tiers are set. A symbol and a sub-symbol are arranged cyclically in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers (descending order with respect to the changing direction of the symbols), and between the main symbols. The sub-design is arranged one by one. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine kinds of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending order of numbers (ascending order with respect to the direction of variation of the symbols), and one sub symbol is provided between the main symbols. It is arranged one by one.

  That is, each of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending order of numbers (ascending order with respect to the direction of symbol variation), and then the main symbol of “9” is arranged. The main symbol “4” is additionally arranged between the main symbols “1” and “1”, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols.

  In the upper display area Dm, 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. In the pachinko machine 10, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5 are set in the upper display area Dm.

  Then, when an effect for game times (variable display times) is performed in the upper display area Dm triggered by winning a prize at the first start port 54 or the second start port 55, the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed. The variable display is started so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. After that, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the game is used in a state where a predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 The production of is ended.

  In addition, when the effect for the game round ends, if it is a game round corresponding to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, a combination of symbols with the same numbers attached to any of the active lines is formed, and the opening / closing execution mode The hit video is displayed as a transition to (occurrence of hit result).

  As described above, the symbol display device 80 (the first result display unit 71a or the second result display unit 71b) fluctuates when one of the first and second start ports 54 and 55 is won. A period from when the display is started, until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the above-mentioned variation display is stopped corresponds to one game time. In addition, the design of the symbol variation display in the symbol display device 80 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 80 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 7, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the pattern.

The lower display area Dn is provided horizontally longer than the upper display area Dm. The lower display area Dn has a first reserved symbol display area Ds on the left side when viewed from the front, a second reserved symbol display area Dt on the right side when viewed from the front, and the first reserved symbol display area Ds and the second reserved symbol. An execution suspension symbol display area Du is provided between the display area Ds and the display area Ds. The first reserved symbol display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserves triggered by winning at the first starting port 54. In the pachinko machine 10, winning at the first starting port 54 is reserved up to four times. Therefore, it is equally divided into first to fourth display areas Ds1 to Ds4 of four small areas. The second reserved symbol display area Dt is an area for displaying the number of holds on the occasion of winning a prize at the second starting port 55. In the pachinko machine 10, winning at the second starting port 55 is reserved up to four times. Therefore, it is equally divided into first to fourth display areas Dt1 to Dt4 of four small areas. The execution holding symbol display area Du is an area for displaying a holding symbol corresponding to the game times variably displayed on the symbol display device 80.

  In the upper display area Dm, if a game ball wins at the first start opening 54 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing, the start of the first lottery game triggered by the winning is suspended. In the first reserved symbol display area Ds of the side display area Dn, the display area with the smallest number (the display area on the center side) of the first to fourth display areas Ds1 to Ds4 in which the reserved symbol is not displayed A hold symbol of one lottery game is displayed. Similarly, if a game ball wins the second starting opening 55 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing, the start of the second lottery game triggered by the winning is suspended, and the lower display area Dn In the second reserved symbol display area Dt, the second lottery game is reserved in the display area (the display area on the central side) of the smallest number among the first to fourth display areas Dt1 to Dt4 in which the reserved symbol is not displayed. A symbol is displayed.

  On the back side of the game board 43, as shown in FIG. 5, there are four movements when the player operates the first frame button 26 during a predetermined period (the effect unit operation effective period described later). The first production unit (normal production means) 310, the second second production unit (normal production means) 320, the third production unit (normal production means) 330, and the one specific unit (specific production means) 340 are provided. It has been. Specifically, the center frame 81 is configured to have a substantially rectangular opening 82 that exposes the display screen 80a. In the front view, the first effect unit 310 is provided at each corner of the opening 82, respectively. Provided, the second effect unit 320 is provided in the central portion on both the left and right sides of the opening portion 82, the third effect unit 330 is provided in the central portion below the opening portion 82, and the specific unit 340 is provided in the opening portion. 82 is provided in the central part above 82.

  In the present embodiment, the specific unit 340 is moved to cause the player to detect (notify) that a hit result is generated during the game time (shifting to the opening / closing execution mode) during the game time. The first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 improve the player's attention to the game while expecting the player to move the specific unit 340 by moving. It is.

  Here, the configuration of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram for explaining the configuration of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340.

  As shown in FIG. 8, each first rendering unit 310 is circular in front view, and includes a first movable part 311 (normally movable part) that covers a part of the display screen 80a from the front, and the first movable unit. 1st drive unit 312 for moving the part 311 is provided.

The first drive unit 312 has a first rail 312a provided with a first conveyance belt (not shown) that extends obliquely from each corner of the opening 82 toward the center and is conveyed by a drive roller. ing. Each first rail 312a is provided so as to extend in and out of the opening 82 in a front view with the peripheral edge of the opening 82 as a reference, and one end side is present on the back surface of the center frame 81. .

  Each first rail 312a is provided with a first guide member 312b that is integrated with the first movable portion 311 and corresponds to the first rail 312a on a one-to-one basis. Specifically, each first guide member 312b has a connecting portion (not shown), and is attached to each first rail 312a by being attached so that the connecting portion meshes with each first transport belt. ing.

  The first drive unit 312 has a first drive unit 312c that drives the drive roller. When the first drive unit 312c is controlled by the MPU 152 provided in the sound lamp control device 92 described later (see FIG. 14), the drive roller is driven and the transport belt is transported. The first guide member 312b (first movable portion 311) is movable along the first rail 312a. Thereby, the 1st movable part 311 integrated with the 1st guide member 312b is also movable along the 1st rail 312a.

  The above is the basic configuration of the first effect unit 310. The configurations of the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340 are basically the same as those of the first effect unit 310. Briefly, the second rendering unit 320 has a circular shape when viewed from the front, a second movable portion 321 (normally movable portion) that covers a part of the display screen 80a from the front, a second rail 322a, and a second guide. And a second drive unit 322 having a member 322b and a second drive unit 322c. The third rendering unit 330 has a circular shape when viewed from the front, a third movable part 331 (normally movable part) that covers a part of the display screen 80a from the front, a third rail 332a, a third guide member 332b, and a third And a third drive unit 332 having three drive units 332c. The specific unit 340 has a circular shape when viewed from the front, a specific movable unit 341 that covers a part of the display screen 80a from the front, a specific drive unit 342 having a specific rail 342a, a specific guide member 342b, and a specific drive unit 342c. It has.

  When the driving units 322c, 332c, and 342c are controlled by the MPU 152 provided in the sound lamp control device 92 described later (see FIG. 14), the driving roller is driven and the conveying belt is conveyed. Thus, the guide members 322b, 332b, and 342b move along the rails 322a, 332a, and 342a. As a result, the movable portions 321, 331, 341 integrated with the respective guide members 322 b, 332 b, 342 b move along the rails 322 a, 332 a, 342 a.

  In the present embodiment, the first movable portion 311, the second movable portion 321, the third movable portion 331, and the specific movable portion 341 are each circular, but the diameter is the first movable portion 311, the second movable portion 331, and the specific movable portion 341. The second movable portion 321, the third movable portion 331, and the specific movable portion 341 are increased in this order. In addition, the first rail 312a, the second rail 322a, the third rail 332a, and the specific rail 342a are configured such that the rail length is increased in the order of the first rail 312a, the second rail 322a, the third rail 332a, and the specific rail 342a. Yes.

  Next, the movable aspect of the first effect unit 310 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 shows the first effect unit 310 provided at the lower left corner of the opening 82 in front view, but the same applies to the movable mode of the first effect unit 310 provided at the other corner. .

As shown in FIG. 9A, in the first effect unit 310, the end portion of the first guide member 312b on one end side in the longitudinal direction on the first rail 312a (the side opposite to the center side of the opening 82). In this case, a part of the first movable part 311 is hidden behind the center frame 81, and only a part of the area covers the display screen 80a. This position becomes the initial position (the retracted position, hereinafter referred to as the first position) in the first movable part 311, and the first movable part 311 performs an effect using the first movable part 311 (first effect unit 310). If not, it is placed in the first position.

  And in the situation where the 1st movable part 311 is arranged in the 1st position, when the 1st drive part 312c will be in a drive state, as shown in Drawing 9 (b) by conveying a conveyance belt, The first movable portion 311 (first guide member 312b) starts to move along the first rail 312a, and as shown in FIG. 9C, the first movable portion 311 (first guide member 312b) is first. The rail 312a moves until it reaches the end of the other end in the longitudinal direction (the center of the opening 82). This position becomes a limit movable position (hereinafter referred to as a second position) in the first movable portion 311. When the first movable portion 311 reaches the second position, the state shown in FIG. ) To the first position. In other words, the first movable portion 311 starts to move from the first position, reaches the second position, and then returns to the first position (first position → second position → first position) as one movable mode. ing.

  In the present embodiment, the first rendering unit 310 includes the first movable unit such that when the first movable unit 311 reaches the second position, the entire first movable unit 311 is disposed on the display screen 80a. The diameter of 311 and the length of the first rail 312a are adjusted.

  The above is the movable aspect of the first effect unit 310. Since the movable aspects of the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340 are basically the same as the movable aspects of the first effect unit 310, detailed description thereof is omitted. Briefly, the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 331 are configured such that the guide members 322b and 332b are at the ends of one end side in the longitudinal direction of the rails 322a and 332a (the side opposite to the central side of the opening 82). And the guide member 322b, 332b is the other end in the longitudinal direction of each rail 322a, 332a. If it is the limit movable position (hereinafter referred to as the second position) of each of the movable parts 321, 331, the case where it exists at the end on the side (the center side of the opening 82) starts to move from the first position to the second position. A period of time until reaching the first position after reaching the first position is a one-time movable mode. Note that the first position and the second position in the first movable part 311, the second movable part 321, and the third movable part 331 are different from each other.

  Similarly, the specific movable portion 341 is the initial position of the specific movable portion 341 when the guide member 342b is present at the end of one end side in the longitudinal direction of each rail 342a (the side opposite to the central side of the opening 82). The position (retracted position, hereinafter referred to as the third position) is specified, and the case where the guide member 342b is present at the end of the other end side in the longitudinal direction of each rail 342a (center side of the opening 82) is specified. Assuming the limit movable position of the movable portion 341 (hereinafter referred to as the fourth position), the movable portion 341 is movable once from the third position until it reaches the fourth position after reaching the fourth position.

As with the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320 and the third effect unit 330 are arranged such that the entire movable parts 321 and 331 are arranged on the display screen 80a at the second position. The diameter of each movable part 321, 331, the length of each rail 322a, 332a, etc. are adjusted. Similarly, in the fourth unit, the specific unit 340 has the diameter of the specific movable unit 341, the length of the specific rail 342a, and the like adjusted so that the entire specific movable unit 341 is disposed on the display screen 80a. . However, in the present embodiment, the first movable portion 311, the second movable portion 321, and the third movable portion 331 are each moved to the second position, and the specific movable portion 341 is moved to the fourth position. As shown in FIG.
341 is configured not to contact each other. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a state when the first movable unit 311, the second movable unit 321, and the third movable unit 331 move to the second position and the specific movable unit 341 moves to the fourth position. is there.

  Then, the one movable period of the 1st effect unit 310 of this embodiment, the 2nd effect unit 320, and the 3rd effect unit 330 is demonstrated. The first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 move between the first position and the second position, respectively, in one movement, but one movement period (basic movement) (Period) is different. Specifically, in the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330, the rail length is increased in the order of the first rail 312a, the second rail 322a, and the third rail 332a. The movable speed (moving speed) is made equal. For this reason, one movable period (basic movable period) becomes longer in the order of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330. Therefore, for example, when the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 start moving simultaneously, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 move in this order. Ends.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 11. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 43), there is a main control device 91 that controls the main game, and a voice lamp control device that controls voice and lamp display. 92 and a display control device 93 that controls the symbol display device 80 are mounted.

  Each of these control devices 91 to 93 is configured such that each control board is accommodated in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. Each board box includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are separated from each other by means of preventing separation (or It is sealed by being inseparably connected by a box connecting portion as a connecting means). And the board | substrate box is connected by these box coupling | bond parts so that separation | separation is impossible, and when the internal space of a board | substrate box is open | released, it has the structure which needs the destruction of the said board | substrate box, or partial excision. For example, a plurality of box coupling portions are provided in the long side portion of the substrate box, and at least one of them is used to perform the coupling process.

  Any configuration can be applied to the box coupling portion as long as the box base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened, but the box base and the box can be inserted by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the box coupling portion. The cover is connected to the cover so that it cannot be opened. The coupling process by the box coupling unit prevents unauthorized opening after the coupling and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. Even after the opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one long hole among the plurality of box coupling portions. And when opening the board box in the event of a failure of the accommodated control board or inspecting the control board, etc., the connection part between the box joint part where the locking claw is inserted and the other box joint part The connecting portion between the box coupling portion and the box body is cut. As a result, the box base and the box cover of the board box are separated, and the internal control board can be taken out. After that, when the coupling process is performed again, a locking claw may be inserted into the long hole of another box coupling portion. If a history of opening the board box is left in the board box, it can be easily found whether or not an illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box.

  In addition, a plurality of coupling pieces are provided on one short side of the substrate box so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of coupled pieces formed on the mounting bases of the control devices 91 to 93, and the board box and the mounting base are formed by the coupling pieces and the coupled pieces. Is combined with the.

  In addition, as a trace means for discovering the unauthorized opening of the substrate box, a seal seal may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal seal is peeled off from the sticking location, the adhesive layer of the seal seal remains on the substrate box side, and the trace remains. Further, an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to the ringing wave having a predetermined frequency is provided on the seal sticker. When the seal sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut and the response It is good also as a structure which cannot transmit a wave.

  3 and FIG. 11, the back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 91, the display controller 93, and the sound lamp controller 92. Yes. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 94 having transparency, and a payout mechanism unit 95 and a control device assembly unit 96 are attached to the back pack 94.

  The payout mechanism 95 includes a tank 97 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a tank rail 98 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 97 and gently inclines toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 98 and a payout device 99 for paying out balls with a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 99a (see FIG. 12). The game balls paid out from the payout device 99 are discharged to the upper plate 25 or the lower plate 30 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 99. Note that a vibrator (not shown) for applying vibration to the tank rail 98 is attached to the tank rail 98. The payout mechanism unit 95 is mounted with a back pack substrate that is supplied with, for example, an AC 24 volt main power supply and is provided with a power switch for turning on and off the power.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the control device assembly unit 96 generates and outputs predetermined power required by the payout control device 100 having a function of controlling the payout device 99, various control devices, and the like. And a power supply control device 101 for controlling the launch of the game ball in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 31. The payout control device 100 and the power supply / launch control device 101 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 100 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the payout control device 100 is provided with a state return switch 102, and the power supply and launch control device 101 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob (not shown) and a RAM erase switch 103. Yes. The state return switch 102 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging of the payout motor 99a (see FIG. 12). The operation knob is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid 47. The RAM erase switch 103 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  The payout control device 100, the power source and the launch control device 101 are configured such that a control board or the like is housed in a board box as in the case of each control apparatus described above, and the same fraud prevention means as described above is provided. . In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing and storing various data, so that even if a power failure occurs, it can maintain the state at the time of the power failure and can return to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure. It is like that.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the back pack 94 is provided with an external output terminal plate 104 at the upper corner portion on the rotating shaft side of the back pack unit 15. The external output terminal plate 104 has an output terminal for outputting a signal when there is a shortage of game balls in the tank 97 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. State transition such as an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a loan is lent, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and an opening / closing execution mode At this time (or during the transition to the state), an output terminal for outputting a signal is provided. And the signal regarding the state of the pachinko machine 10 is output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals.

  Note that an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of game balls are lent out is not necessary in a so-called cash machine. Each control device (each control board), which will be described in detail later, is an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, and random number generation used in various lotteries. And a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are mounted as necessary.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. 12 to 14 are block diagrams showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 12 mainly shows the overall configuration, FIG. 13 mainly shows the configuration of the main controller 91, and FIG. The structure of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 92 and the display control apparatus 93 is shown. In FIG. 14, supply lines for operating power from the power supply and launch control device 101 to the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 are indicated by double arrows, and other supply lines and signal lines are indicated by solid arrows. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, the main control device 91 includes a main control board 111 that controls the main control of the game. An MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111, and a ROM 113 and a RAM 114 are built in the MPU 112. Hereinafter, the MPU 112, the ROM 113, and the RAM 114 of the main controller 91 will be described as the main MPU 112, the main ROM 113, and the main RAM 114.

  The main ROM 113 is configured to use, as a read-only memory, a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory. The main ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main MPU 112. For example, as shown in FIG. 13, a special symbol admission table storage area 113a, a distribution table Storage area 113b, reach table storage area 113c, variable display time table storage area 113d, stop result table storage area 113e, normal symbol success / failure table storage area 113f, special figure special electricity address table storage area 113g, ordinary figure ordinary telephone address table storage It has an area 113h, an update data table storage area 113i, and a command information storage area 113j.

The main-side RAM 114 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage and retention, such as SRAM and DRAM, for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the main ROM 113. The main RAM 114 temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the main ROM 113 is executed. The main RAM 114 includes, for example, a lottery counter buffer 114a, a special symbol reservation ball storage area 114b, a normal symbol reservation ball storage area 114c, a special symbol special electricity counter area 114d, a special symbol special electricity timer counter area 114e, and a high probability mode flag storage area. 114f, hour / hour flag storage area 114g, hour / hour count counter area 114
h, a general-purpose power counter area 114i, a general-purpose power counter counter area 114j, various hit result flag storage areas 114k, other various counter areas 114m, and other various flag storage areas 114n.

  In addition to the above elements, the main control board 111 or the main MPU 112 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. It is not essential that the main MPU 112 has a single-chip configuration including the main ROM 113 and the main RAM 114. The main MPU 112, the main ROM 113, and the main RAM 114 are individually chipped. A configuration may be adopted. The same applies to each control device described later other than the main control device 91.

  The main MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port (not shown). Note that an input / output port may be provided instead of the input port and the output port, and the input port and the output port may be switched as necessary. The same applies to the MPUs of the control devices described later other than the main control device 91. Various control devices 92 and 100 are connected to the input side and the output side of the main side MPU 112, and various detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a, 115, various drive units 56d and 63a, and a main unit are connected. A display unit 71 is connected. First, the connection configuration between the various detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a, 115, the various drive units 56d, 63a, and the main display unit 71 will be described. The detection sensor 115 is a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, a vibration detection sensor, or the like.

  On the input side of the main MPU 112, a prize detection provided for the game area general winning port 53, the first starting port 54, the second starting port 55, the variable winning device 56, and the normal symbol starting gate 57. Sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, and 57a (hereinafter collectively referred to as winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, and 57a) are electrically connected via electrical wiring. In this case, the main control board 111 and each winning detection sensor 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a may be connected via one electrical wiring, and a relay board is interposed in the middle of each signal path. It is good also as composition which is doing. The same applies to the configuration related to connection with other devices. The main MPU 112 receives signals from the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, and 57a through the winning ICs 116 mounted on the main control board 111, and determines a winning determination for each winning portion based on the reception result. (Entry check) is performed. In addition, the main MPU 112 executes a winning lottery (first and second lottery games) triggered by winnings at the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55, and also wins the normal symbol starting gate 57. Based on this, an electric-powered article opening lottery (support lottery) is executed.

  The winning IC 116 is a path abnormality confirmation means or a path abnormality confirmation circuit, and a normal signal is transmitted between each winning detection sensor 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a and the main MPU 112 by the winning IC 116. Check if transmission is taking place.

  In addition to the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, and 57a, other detection sensors 115 such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor are provided on the input side of the main MPU 112 via electric wiring. Are electrically connected. The main MPU 112 receives signals from other detection sensors 115 such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor, and based on the reception result, determines whether or not an abnormality that is a detection target has occurred. To do.

On the output side of the main MPU 112, a variable winning drive unit 56d that opens and closes the opening / closing plate 56b of the variable winning device 56 and an electric combination driving unit 63a that opens and closes the electric combination 63 are electrically connected via electric wiring. Connected. The main display unit 71 is electrically connected to the output side of the main MPU 112 via electric wiring. The main control board 111 is provided with various driver circuits. Through the driver circuit, the main MPU 112 performs drive control of the variable prize driving unit 56d and the electric accessory driving unit 63a and displays the main display unit 71. Execute control.

  For example, in the opening / closing execution mode, drive control of the variable winning drive unit 56d is executed in the main MPU 112 so that the special winning opening 56a is opened and closed. In addition, when the electrified product 63 is in the open state, the main MPU 112 performs drive control of the electrified product driving unit 63a so that the electrified product 63 is opened and closed. Further, in each game round, display control of the main display unit 71 (first and second result display units 71a and 71b) is executed in the main MPU 112. When the lottery result indicating whether or not the electric accessory 63 is to be opened is displayed, the display control of the main display unit 71 (other display unit 71d) is executed in the main MPU 112.

  The main MPU 112 sets information according to the progress of the game in the main RAM 114. Although omitted in FIG. 12, an external output terminal board 104 (see FIG. 3) is connected to the output side of the main MPU 112, and the main MPU 112 performs a signal according to information set in the main RAM 114. Setting for output is performed on the external output terminal board 104, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 is recognized by the hall computer of the game hall.

  Next, a configuration in connection (communication) between the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 will be described. First, before describing the configuration of these connections (communication), the electrical configuration of the payout control apparatus 100 will be described.

  The payout control apparatus 100 includes a payout control board 121 that controls the payout of game balls through the payout apparatus 99. The payout control board 121 includes an MPU 122, and the MPU 122 includes a ROM 123 and a RAM 124. . Hereinafter, the MPU 122, the ROM 123, and the RAM 124 provided in the payout control apparatus 100 are referred to as the payout side MPU 122, the payout side ROM 123, and the payout side RAM 124.

  The payout-side ROM 123 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, as a read-only memory. The payout side ROM 123 stores various control programs executed by the payout side MPU 122 and fixed value data.

  The payout-side RAM 124 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires external power supply for storage and holding, such as SRAM and DRAM, for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the payout-side ROM 123. The payout side RAM 124 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the payout side ROM 123. In addition, the payout control board 121 or the payout side MPU 122 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit and the like in addition to the above-described elements.

The payout side MPU 122 is electrically connected to the payout device 99. The payout device 99 is switched between a state in which the game balls supplied from the tank 97 to the payout device 99 are prevented from passing downstream so as not to flow downstream and a state in which the game balls are sent downstream. A payout motor 99a for driving a ball stopper member such as a rotating body is provided, and a payout detection sensor 99b for individually detecting game balls sent to the downstream side is provided. A payout motor 99a is electrically connected to the output side of the payout side MPU 122 via an electrical wiring, and a payout detection sensor 99b is electrically connected to the input side of the payout side MPU 122 via an electrical wiring. Has been. The payout-side MPU 122 supplies a drive signal to the payout motor 99a via a driver circuit provided on the payout control board 121 to execute payout of the game ball, and payout based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor 99b. Know the number of completed game balls.

  Further, the payout-side MPU 122 is electrically connected to the ball lending connection terminal plate 131 provided in the back pack unit 15 via electric wiring, and the ball lending connection terminal plate 131 is connected to the ball lending connection terminal plate 131 via electric wiring. Is electrically connected to the card unit. Thereby, the player can receive the rental of the game ball by manually operating the ball rental button 28 provided on the pachinko machine 10 as appropriate. The payout-side MPU 122 executes control of rental balls by transmitting and receiving electrical signals to and from the card unit.

  Further, in addition to the payout device 99 and the card unit, the payout side MPU 122 is electrically connected to a full detection sensor (not shown) for detecting whether the game ball is full in the lower plate 30 as a ball receiving tray. In addition, a no-sphere detection sensor (not shown) for detecting whether the tank 97 is in a no-sphere state is electrically connected.

  Then, the payout MPU 122 controls the payout of the game ball based on communication with the main MPU 112. As a configuration for performing the communication, a plurality of signal paths exist between the main control board 111 and the payout control device 100.

  For details on the signal path, when the main MPU 112 confirms winning in the winning portion corresponding to the generation of the winning ball based on the detection results of the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, and 56c, the main MPU 112 moves toward the payout MPU 122. A prize ball command (payout command information) is transmitted, and a first signal path SL1 is provided to transmit the prize ball command. In this case, the prize ball command includes information indicating that it is a prize ball command and information on the number of prize balls to be executed, and is configured as information of a plurality of bits.

  There are a plurality of prize ball commands, and the command information storage area 113j of the main ROM 113 is referred to. When the winning to the general winning opening 53 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output. When the winning to the variable winning device 56 is specified, 13 winning balls are output. When a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of game balls is output and a winning to the first and second start ports 54 and 55 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out three game balls is output. The

  Here, in the present embodiment, in performing communication of the prize ball command, the first signal path SL1 is set to perform serial communication instead of parallel communication. That is, the information of multiple bits included in the prize ball command is sequentially transmitted through a single signal path. The first signal path SL1 is formed by a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. Although it is comprised, it is not limited to this, You may be comprised by the some connector unit by interposing a relay board | substrate etc. in the middle position of a signal path | route.

In addition, a second signal path SL2 and a third signal path SL3 are provided as signal paths for transmitting information from the payout MPU 122 to the main MPU 112. The second signal path SL2 is used to transmit a payout status command (payout status information) from the payout MPU 122 to the main MPU 112. The payout status command includes a prize ball completion command indicating the completion of the prize ball and the number of the prize balls completed, an abnormality start command indicating that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the game ball payout, An abnormal termination command indicating that the abnormality has been released is included. That is, the payout status command includes information indicating the type of the command and information indicating the content of the payout status, and is configured as information of a plurality of bits. The predetermined abnormality related to the game ball payout includes, for example, a full state of the lower plate 30 and a no-ball state of the tank 97.

  In communication of the payout status command, the second signal path SL2 is set to perform serial communication instead of parallel communication, like the first signal path SL1. That is, a plurality of bits of information included in the payout status command are sequentially transmitted through a single signal path. The second signal path SL2 is formed by a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. Although it is comprised, it is not limited to this, You may be comprised by the some connector unit by interposing a relay board | substrate etc. in the middle position of a signal path | route.

  The third signal path SL3 is used to transmit a payout permission signal from the payout MPU 121 toward the main MPU 112. The payout permission signal is information transmitted from the payout MPU 122 to the main MPU 112 so that the main MPU 112 can grasp the output timing of the prize ball command.

  The payout permission signal is composed of 1-bit information, and a LOW level signal is transmitted when the output of the prize ball command is prohibited, and an HI level signal is transmitted when the output of the prize ball command is permitted. The However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a HI level signal is transmitted when the prize ball command output is prohibited, and a LOW level signal is outputted when the prize ball command output is permitted. It is good also as a structure to be made.

  The third signal path SL3 is formed by a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electric wiring. Although it is comprised, it is not limited to this, You may be comprised by the some connector unit by interposing a relay board | substrate etc. in the middle position of a signal path | route.

  As described above, the command communication between the main side MPU 112 and the payout side MPU 122 is not the parallel communication but the serial communication, so that the electric wiring for electrically connecting the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 is assumed. Even if an illegal act using a so-called hanging board to connect an illegal board is performed, the possibility that the illegal board is hidden in the electrical wiring or the like is reduced. The above action is performed in an attempt to illegally receive a large amount of game balls, and the signal path between the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 is likely to be targeted. In this case, in a configuration in which bidirectional command communication is performed between the main MPU 112 and the payout MPU 122, if parallel communication is adopted as command communication, the number of electrical wirings increases accordingly, and the above-mentioned unauthorized board becomes It becomes easy to hide by electric wiring. On the other hand, when the command communication is performed by serial communication, the illegal board is not easily hidden in the electric wiring, and it is easy to find it when the board is temporarily installed.

  Next, a configuration in electrical connection between the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 and the power supply and launch control device 101 will be described.

The power supply and launch control apparatus 101 includes a power supply and launch control board 141, and the power supply and launch control board 141 has a function of supplying operating power to various devices including the main control apparatus 91 and the payout control apparatus 100. A power supply circuit 142 is provided. The power supply circuit 142 is provided with a power-on power supply unit 143 and a power-off power supply unit 144.

  The power-on power supply unit 143 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the main controller 91, the payout controller 100, etc. The operation voltage required for each is generated, and the generated operation voltage is supplied to the main control device 91, the payout control device 100, and the like. As its outline, the power-on power supply unit 143 takes in the AC 24 volt power supplied through the connection board provided in the back pack unit 15 and + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, motors, etc. A + 5V voltage or the like for logic is generated, and these + 12V and + 5V voltages are supplied to the main controller 91, the payout controller 100, and the like. The connection board is provided with a power switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the main controller 91 is provided with a power failure monitoring board 117 in the middle of the power supply path between the power-on power supply unit 143 and the main-side MPU 112. The power failure monitoring board 117 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage supplied from the power-on power supply unit 143. Then, when this voltage is less than 22 volts, it is determined that a power interruption has occurred, and the output setting of the power failure signal (power interruption signal) to the main MPU 112 is set to correspond to the occurrence of a power failure (power interruption). Specifically, a LOW level power failure signal is transmitted in a situation where it is determined that a power shutdown has not occurred, and a HI level power failure signal is transmitted in a situation where it is determined that a power shutdown has occurred. . The relationship between LOW and HI may be reversed.

  The power supply unit 144 for power interruption includes a capacitor. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from a commercial power supply), the power supplied from the power supply unit 143 for power supply is used. Charged. Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in an OFF state or when the power is cut off such as when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply (when power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off), the power supply unit 144 is discharged from the power interruption. As a result, storage holding power (backup power) is supplied to the main RAM 114. Therefore, even in such a situation, the information stored in the main RAM 114 is stored and held without being erased while the power for storing and holding is supplied from the power supply unit 144 for power interruption.

  Note that the capacity of the power supply unit 144 for power interruption is relatively large, and the information stored in the main RAM 114 before the power interruption is retained within a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days). . The configuration of the power interruption power supply unit 144 is not limited to the capacitor, and may be a battery, a non-rechargeable battery, or the like. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, it is not necessary to store power to the power supply unit 144 for power interruption when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, but it is necessary to replace it periodically.

  Although not shown in the figure, the power supply and launch control board 141 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure processing different from the power supply unit 144 for power interruption. In the power supply and launch control board 141, even after the DC stable power supply of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit for power failure processing is discharged for a time sufficient for execution of power failure processing. The system is configured to maintain an output of 5 volts, which is a drive power source of the system, at a normal value. Thus, the main MPU 112 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  Here, the configuration related to the supply of operating power from the power supply circuit 142 to the main MPU 112 and the payout MPU 122 will be described.

The power from the power-on power supply unit 143 is supplied from the VCC terminal of the main MPU 112 and the payout MP.
It is supplied to the VCC terminal of U122. In a situation where power is supplied from the commercial power supply by the power supplied to the VCC terminal, various control processes are executed in the MPUs 112 and 122, and information is stored and held in the RAMs 114 and 124. Is called.

  On the other hand, the power from the power supply unit 144 for power interruption is supplied to the VBB terminal of the main MPU 112 but is not supplied to the VBB terminal (not shown) of the payout MPU 122. That is, the power for storing and holding power from the power supply unit 144 for power interruption is supplied to the main RAM 114 but not supplied to the payout RAM 124. Therefore, in a situation where the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the main RAM 114 stores information, but the payout RAM 124 does not store information. Note that the VBB terminal of the payout side MPU 122 is grounded or not connected to any electrical wiring.

  As described above, the storage holding power from the power interruption time power supply unit 144 is supplied to the main RAM 114 but not supplied to the payout side RAM 124, thereby reducing the capacity of the power interruption time power supply unit 144. Is planned. Thereby, the initial cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In addition to the power supply circuit 142, the power supply and launch control board 141 is provided with a launch control circuit 145 responsible for launch control of game balls. The firing control circuit 145 is provided with a transmission circuit 146 that satisfies a condition, a receiving circuit 147 that is permitted to fire, and a launching IC 148.

  The condition establishment transmission circuit 146 has a function of transmitting a condition establishment signal having a predetermined signal form to the main MPU 112 when a predetermined game ball firing condition is established. Specifically, the launch control circuit 145 has a touch sensor 31a for detecting that the annular handle portion of the operation handle 31 is touched by the player and a game even when the handle portion is being rotated. A stop switch 31b which is manually operated by the player to stop the ball firing is electrically connected. Further, the launch control circuit 145 is electrically connected to the payout control board 121 and inputs a signal indicating whether or not the card unit is electrically connected to the ball lending connection terminal board 131.

  The transmission circuit 146 that satisfies the condition receives a signal indicating that the handle is being touched by the player from the touch sensor 31a, and receives a signal indicating that the player is not manually operated from the stop switch 31b. Further, when a signal indicating that the card unit is connected is received from the payout side MPU 122, a HI level condition establishment signal (a signal corresponding to the condition establishment) is transmitted to the main side MPU 112. If any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition establishment signal (a signal not corresponding to the condition establishment) is transmitted to the main MPU 112. Further, the configuration is not limited to this, and the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed.

  The firing permission receiving circuit 147 permits the HI level firing permission transmitted from the main MPU 112 on the condition that the HI level condition satisfying signal is transmitted from the condition satisfying transmission circuit 146 to the main MPU 112. It has a function of receiving a signal (a signal corresponding to the launch permission) and continuously supplying the corresponding signal to the launch IC 148 when the launch permission signal is received. The main side MPU 112 transmits a LOW level launch permission signal (a signal not corresponding to launch permission) when it does not receive a HI level condition fulfillment signal from the condition fulfillment transmission circuit 146. The relationship between the LOW level signal and the HI level signal of the permission signal may be reversed. Further, the main side MPU 112 newly starts transmission of the HI level firing permission signal every time reception of the HI level condition satisfaction signal is started, and when reception of the HI level condition satisfaction signal is completed, The transmission permission signal is terminated.

  When the launch IC 148 receives the launch permission signal of HI level or a signal corresponding thereto from the launch permission receiving circuit 147, the launch IC 148 is connected to each of the launch solenoid 47 and the ball feeder 46 of the game ball launch mechanism 44. It has a function of outputting a drive signal periodically. In this case, launch IC 148 outputs each drive signal as a pulse signal, and its output cycle is 0.6 sec. Further, the output timing of the drive signal is set earlier in the ball feeding device 46 than in the firing solenoid 47 so that the game ball is fired after one game ball is supplied to the firing rail 45.

  Further, the operation handle 31 is provided with a variable resistor as an operation amount detection means for detecting the operation amount as described above, and the launch IC 148 is based on a voltage input from the variable resistor. The firing intensity is adjusted by adjusting the voltage of the drive signal supplied to the firing solenoid 47. For this reason, the greater the amount of operation of the operation handle 31, the stronger the launch strength of the game ball by the launch solenoid 47. It is not essential that the adjustment function is provided in the launch IC 148, and an adjustment circuit may be provided in the middle of the signal path between the launch IC 148 and the launch solenoid 47.

  Next, a configuration of electrical connection between the sound lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The sound lamp control device 92 includes a sound lamp control board 151. The sound lamp control board 151 includes an MPU 152. The MPU 152 includes a ROM 153 and a RAM 154. Hereinafter, the MPU 152, the ROM 153, and the RAM 154 provided in the audio lamp control device 92 will be described as the audio side MPU 152, the audio side ROM 153, and the audio side RAM 154.

  The voice-side ROM 153 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, as a read-only memory. The voice-side ROM 153 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the voice-side MPU 152. For example, the various data table storage area 153a, the notice response effect operation effective period storage area 153b, the effect unit It has an operation effective period storage area 153c, various effect unit movable period storage areas 153d, a command information storage area 153e, and the like.

  The various data table storage area 153a is an area in which light emission data, audio output data, a specific unit movable lottery table, and the like are stored. The notice response effect operation effective period storage area 153b is an area in which a period during which a response effect can be generated when a notice effect such as a conversation effect or a character effect is displayed on the display screen 80a is stored. The effect unit operation effective period storage area 153c is an area in which a period during which the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340 can be moved is stored. The various effect unit movable period storage area 153d is an area in which one movable period (basic movable period) of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 is stored. The command information storage area 153e is an area in which command information referred to when generating various commands output from the voice-side MPU 152 is stored.

The voice-side RAM 154 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires external power supply for storage and holding, such as SRAM and DRAM, for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for readout is faster than that of the voice ROM 153. The voice side RAM 154 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the voice side ROM 153 is executed. The voice side RAM 154 stores, for example, a command storage area 154a, a notice response production operation valid period timer counter area 154b, a production unit operation valid period timer counter area 154c, a production unit movable period timer counter rear 154d, a holding data area 154e, and various flags. An area 154f, various counter areas 154g, and the like are included.

  The command storage area 154a is an area for storing a command received from the main MPU 112. The advance notice response effect operation valid period timer counter area 154b is an area in which the advance notice response effect operation valid period timer counter in which the advance notice response effect operation valid period is set is stored. The effect unit operation effective period timer counter area 154c is an area in which an effect unit operation effective period timer counter in which the effect unit operation effective period is set is stored. The various effect unit movable period timer counter area 154d is an area in which the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters in which one movable period of the first to third effect units 310 to 330 is set are stored. . The retained data area 154e is data temporarily used to execute effects during game play and in the opening / closing execution mode, and notification, and even after the effects and notifications are started, the audio side MPU 152 This is an area for storing and holding data that can be used independently. The various flag storage areas 154f are areas in which a notice response rendering operation effective period standby flag, a rendering unit operation effective period standby flag, and the like are stored. The various counter areas 154g are areas in which a game number counter, a specific unit movable lottery counter, a notice response effect operation effective period standby timer counter, an effect unit operation effective period standby timer counter, and the like are stored.

  Then, in the voice side MPU 152, based on various commands received from the main control device 91 (a variation command, a type command, a fixed stop command, an opening command, an ending command, a hold command, etc. described later) The contents of the performance to be executed in the above are determined. Then, the lamp control device 155 is controlled to perform the light emission control of the illumination unit 33 and the sound output device 156 is controlled to perform the sound control of the speaker unit 34 so that the operation corresponding to the determined content is performed. Do.

  A first frame button detection sensor 26 a that detects the operation of the first frame button 26 and a second frame button detection sensor 27 a that detects the operation of the second frame button 27 are electrically connected to the input side of the audio side MPU 152. ing. Then, the audio side MPU 152 monitors whether or not the first and second frame buttons 26 and 27 are operated. When the first and second frame buttons 26 and 27 are operated, processing corresponding to the operation is executed. To do.

  In addition, the first drive unit 312c, the second drive unit 322c, the third drive unit 332c, and the specific drive unit 342c are electrically connected to the output side of the audio side MPU 152, and the operation of the first frame button 26 is performed. Based on the above, the first drive unit 312c, the second drive unit 322c, the third drive unit 332c, and the specific drive unit 342c are controlled. That is, based on the operation of the first frame button 26, the movement of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340 is controlled.

  Further, the voice side MPU 152 specifies whether or not notification is necessary based on the command received from the main control device 91, and performs the light emission control of the lamp control device 155 and the voice control of the voice output device 156. Notification.

Various commands output from the main MPU 112 will be described in detail later. These various commands are output with reference to the command information storage area 113j of the main ROM 113. The various commands are configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes. The command transmission from the main MPU 112 to the voice MPU 152 is basically performed serially, but may be configured to be performed in parallel.

  The audio side MPU 152 is electrically connected to the display control device 93 and transmits various commands including the contents of effects determined based on the command received from the main control device 91 to the display control device 93. Note that various commands output from the voice-side MPU 152 are referred to the command information storage area 153e of the voice-side ROM 153. Further, the display control device 93 of the present embodiment is not configured to receive a command from the main control device 91 without going through the sound lamp control device 92, and the sound lamp control device in relation to the main control device 91. It can be said that it exists on the downstream side of the communication direction from 92.

  The display control device 93 includes a display control board 161, and an MPU 162 is mounted on the display control board 161, and a program ROM 163 and a work RAM 164 are built in the MPU 162. The display control board 161 includes a VDP (video display processor) 165, a character ROM 166, and a video RAM 167. Hereinafter, the MPU 162 of the display control device 93 will be described as the display-side MPU 162.

  The program ROM 163 is configured to use, as a read-only memory, a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage unit) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory. The program ROM 163 stores various control programs executed by the display side MPU 162 and fixed value data. For example, a command information storage area 163a referred to when a command to the VDP 165 is transmitted, and each effect It has a data table storage area 163b in which processing necessary for displaying an image corresponding to (display) is defined.

  The work RAM 164 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding, such as SRAM and DRAM, for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the program ROM 163. The work RAM 164 temporarily stores various data, flags, and the like when the control program stored in the program ROM 163 is executed. The work RAM 164 has, for example, a command storage area 164a.

  The display-side MPU 162 analyzes various commands received from the audio lamp control device 92 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 165 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 165). To implement.

  The VDP 165 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 80. Since the VDP 165 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 165 should be said to be a microcomputer chip incorporating a firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 165 adjusts the timings of the display side MPU 162, the video RAM 167, etc., and intervenes in reading and writing data, and reads out image data from the character ROM 166 at a predetermined timing and stores it in the video RAM 167 in accordance with the image data. The displayed image is displayed on the symbol display device 80.

The character ROM 166 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 80. The character ROM 166 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The character ROM 166 also has image data to be displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Ds, the second reserved symbol display area Dt, and the execution reserved symbol display area Du of the symbol display device 80 as part of the data. Is set in the image data storage area for holding 166a.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 166 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 166. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 163 is stored in the character ROM 166.

  The video RAM 167 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 80, and the display content of the symbol display device 80 is changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM 167.

  The video RAM 167 has a reserved symbol display area 167a. Then, the reserved symbol display area 167a has first to fourth units so as to correspond to the first to fourth display areas Ds1 to Ds4 of the first reserved symbol display area Ds in the symbol display device 80 on a one-to-one basis. Areas RE1 to RE4 are set. The reserved symbol display area 167a has a first to fourth unit so as to correspond to the first to fourth display areas Dt1 to Dt4 of the second reserved symbol display area Dt in the symbol display device 80 on a one-to-one basis. Areas RF1 to RF4 are set. Furthermore, an execution unit area RG is set in the reserved symbol display area 167a so as to correspond to the execution reserved symbol display area Du in the symbol display device 80 on a one-to-one basis. In the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4, Dt1 to Dt4, and Du, images corresponding to the data written in the unit areas RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, and RG in the reserved symbol display area 167a are displayed. The When no data is set in each unit area RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, and RG (when blank data is set), the unit areas RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, and RG are set. In each of the display areas Ds1 to Ds4, Dt1 to Dt4, and Du corresponding to, no image is displayed or a background image on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80 is displayed.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that commands are exchanged between the audio-side MPU 152 and the display-side MPU 162 by bidirectional communication. Specifically, the sound lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are electrically connected using a first signal line group 170, and display is performed from the sound side MPU 152 using the first signal line group 170. A command is transmitted to the side MPU 162. This command transmission is performed by serial communication, and the first signal line group 170 identifies a signal line 171 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, 1-bit data) included in the command data. A signal line 172 for a clock signal to be transmitted, and a signal line 173 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of a transmission start and a transmission end of one command. Note that a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided.

The audio lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are electrically connected using the second signal line group 180, and the display side MPU 162 is connected to the audio side MPU 152 using the second signal line group 180. A command is sent to Since this command transmission is performed by serial communication, the second signal line group 180 includes a signal line 181 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, 1-bit data) included in the command data. A clock signal signal line 182 for identifying and at least a latch signal signal line 182 for recognizing at least one of transmission start and transmission end of one command are included. Note that a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided.

  The first signal line group 170 and the second signal line group 180 are provided as one connection unit. The connection unit includes a connector in which one ends of the first signal line group 170 and the second signal line group 180 are integrated, and a connector in which the other ends are integrated, and one connector is an audio lamp control device. The other connector is detachably attached to the connector of the display control device 93.

  The communication method between the audio side MPU 152 and the display side MPU 162 is not limited to serial communication, and may be parallel communication. Alternatively, the first signal line group 170 and the second signal line group 180 may be provided as separate connection units.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 112>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in the success / failure lottery and the like.

  The main side MPU 112 performs winning lottery, setting of display of the main display unit 71, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 80, and the like using various counter information in the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, the winning random number counter C1 used for winning lottery, the winning type counter C2 used when determining the winning type, and the reach when the symbol display device 80 fluctuates. Reach random number counter C3 used for generation lottery, random number initial value counter CINI1 used for initial value setting of winning random number counter C1, and variation type counter CS for determining variation display time in main display unit 71 and symbol display device 80 , An electric accessory release random number counter C4 used for lottery of whether or not the electric accessory 63 is in an open state, and a random number initial value counter CINI2 used for setting an initial value of the electric accessory release random number counter C4. Is used. A part of each counter is updated at an interval of 4 msec which is an execution interval of a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) described later, and the remaining counters are updated irregularly in a main process (see FIG. 19) described later. The updated value is sequentially stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a of the main RAM 114. And the predetermined numerical value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55 is sequentially stored in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 114b in the main RAM 114. A predetermined numerical value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a at the timing when the game ball passes the normal symbol start gate 57 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c in the main RAM 114. The counters C1 to C3, CINI1, CS, CINI2, and C4 are provided in various other counter areas 114m of the main RAM 114.

  Here, the configuration of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 114b and the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 114c will be described.

The special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b includes first to fourth reserved areas RA1 to RA4, a first special symbol reserved ball storage area RA having a first special symbol reserved number storage area NA, and first to fourth reserved areas. It has a second special symbol reserved ball storage area RB having RB1 to RB4 and a second special symbol reserved number storage area NB, a total reserved number storage area NX, and one execution area RC. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a configuration of the first reserved area RA1 in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area RA. In addition, the 1st-4th in 2nd-4th reservation area RA2-RA4 in 2nd special symbol reservation ball storage area RB in 1st special symbol reservation ball storage area RA.
The configurations of the holding areas RB1 to RB4 and the execution area RC are the same as those in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the first to fourth reserved areas RA1 to RA4, RB1 to RB4, and the execution area RC include a hit random number counter storage area 201, a hit type counter storage area 202, a reach random number counter storage area 203, and A winning start port storage area 204 is provided. In the first to fourth reservation areas RA1 to RA4 in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area RA, the winning random number counter C1 and the winning type counter C2 are matched to the winning history of the game balls to the first starting port 54. , And each value of the reach random number counter C3 (each value of the lottery counter buffer 114a) are stored in the hit random number counter storage area 201, the hit type counter storage area 202, the reach random number counter storage area 203, and the first start port The winning information for 54 is stored in the winning start opening storage area 204. And when the winning of a game ball continuously occurs with respect to the first start port 54, each of the first reservation area RA1, the second reservation area RA2, the third reservation area RA3, and the fourth reservation area RA4. Numerical information and the like are stored in time series. As described above, by providing the four reserved areas RA1 to RA4 in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area RA, it is possible to store a maximum of four game ball winning histories to the first starting port 54 as a whole. (Pending storage).

  Similarly, in the first to fourth holding areas RB1 to RB4 in the second special symbol holding ball storage area RB, a winning random number counter C1 and a winning type counter are matched to the winning history of the game balls to the second starting port 55. Each value of C2 and reach random number counter C3 (each value of lottery counter buffer 114a) is stored in hit random number counter storage area 201, hit type counter storage area 202, reach random number counter storage area 203, and second start The winning information for the mouth 55 is stored in the winning start opening storage area 204. And when the winning of a game ball continuously occurs with respect to the second start opening 55, each of the first reservation area RB1 → second reservation area RB2 → third reservation area RB3 → fourth reservation area RB4 Numerical information and the like are stored in time series. As described above, by providing the four holding areas RB1 to RB4 in the second special symbol holding ball storage area RB, a maximum of four game ball winning histories to the second starting port 55 are memorized as a whole. (Pending storage).

  That is, in this pachinko machine 10, since a maximum of four game balls winning histories to each of the first start port 54 and the second start port 55 are stored, a maximum of eight as a whole is reserved and stored. Further, when the number of reserves for the winning start opening is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value is not acquired and three prize balls (in this embodiment, three game balls). Only) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player. In the present embodiment, the total number that can be reserved and stored is described as eight, but the total number that can be stored and stored is not limited to eight, and may be arbitrary, four, six, or Other plural numbers such as nine or more may be used. In addition, the numbers that can be stored in the first start port 54 and the second start port 55 may be different.

  When the execution area RC starts the variable display of the main display unit 71 (the first result display unit 71a or the second result display unit 71b), each value stored in the first reservation area RA1 or the first reservation area RB1. This is an area for moving the game, and at the start of one game round, determination of success or failure is made based on various numerical information stored in the execution area RC.

  In addition, the first special symbol reservation number storage area NA provided in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area RA is a holding number of the first lottery game (variable display hold triggered by winning a prize at the first start port 54) Number). Similarly, the second special symbol holding number storage area NB provided in the second special symbol holding ball storage area RB has a second lottery game holding number (variable display triggered by winning at the second start opening 55). This is an area for storing the (holding number). The total reserved number storage area NX is a storage area for storing the total number (total reserved number) of the first special symbol reserved number storage area NA and the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB.

  In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 114c, the value of the electric-equipment release random number counter C4 (the value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a) is matched to the winning (passing) history of the game ball to the normal symbol start gate 57. Is a reserved area for storing chronologically.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 114c includes four storage areas, an execution area RD5 and a reserved number storage area NC, which are first to fourth reservation areas RD1 to RD4. The four storage areas of the first to fourth reservation areas RD1 to RD4 are configured to store (hold storage) a maximum of four game ball winning histories to the normal symbol start gate 57.

  Specifically, when winnings to the normal symbol start gate 57 occur continuously, the electric parts are released in the order of the first holding area RD1, the second holding area RD2, the third holding area RD3, and the fourth holding area RD4. The value of the random number counter C4 is stored in time series. By providing four areas in this way, up to four game ball winning histories to the normal symbol start gate 57 are stored.

  The execution area RD5 is an area for moving the numerical value stored in the first reservation area RD1. Then, when performing the open lottery of the electric accessory 63, whether or not it is determined based on various numerical information stored in the execution area RD5.

  In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 114c, the number that can be reserved is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, five or more. Or may be singular.

  Returning to the description of the counter, the various counters will be specifically described.

  For example, the winning random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and counting starts again from the initial value. The random number initial value counter CINI1 is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55.

  The value of the random number that is won in the winning lottery (win / no lottery) is stored as a special symbol pass / fail table storage area 113a as a pass / fail information group storage means in the main ROM 113 as a special symbol pass / fail table (a pass / fail information group in the grant information). Yes. Here, the contents of the special symbol success / failure table storage area 113a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the special symbol success / failure table in the present embodiment, wherein (a) shows a special symbol success / failure table for the low probability mode, and (b) shows a special symbol success / failure for the high probability mode. Shows the table.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the special symbol success / failure table includes a special symbol success / failure table (low probability success / failure information group) for FIG. 17 (a) and a high probability mode for FIG. 17 (b). Special symbol success / failure table (high probability success / failure information group) is set. That is, in this embodiment, the low probability mode (low probability correspondence state) and the high probability mode (high probability correspondence state) are set as the lottery modes in the winning lottery.

  In the present embodiment, in the gaming state in which the special symbol success / failure table for the low probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, as shown in FIG. 17 (a), the random value ( That is, the winning information) is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the special symbol success / failure table for the high probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, as shown in FIG. Information) is 21 pieces. In the present embodiment, the value group (7, 307) of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the winning lottery in the situation of the low probability mode is the winning random number counter that wins the winning lottery in the situation of the high probability mode. It is included in the value group of C1. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

  The hit type counter C2 is incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55.

  The game result distribution destination for the win type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group in the assigned information) in the distribution table storage area 113b as a distribution information group storage unit in the main ROM 113. 18A and 18B are diagrams for explaining the distribution table, where FIG. 18A is a distribution table (first distribution information group) for the first result display unit, and FIG. 18B is a table for the second result display unit. It is a distribution table (2nd distribution information group). The distribution table for the first result display unit is a table that is referred to when the distribution lottery is performed on the hold information acquired based on the winning at the first start port 54. In addition, the distribution table for the second result display unit is a table that is referred to when the distribution lottery is performed on the hold information acquired based on the winning to the second start port 55.

  In the distribution table for the first result display section, as shown in FIG. 18A, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29” as the distribution destination of the game result, “0 to 9 "Corresponds to the 16R probability variation result," 10 to 23 "corresponds to the 4R probability variation result, and" 24 to 29 "corresponds to the 16R normal variation result.

  On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second result display section, as shown in FIG. 18B, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29” as the distribution destination of the game result, “0 ˜23 ”corresponds to the 16R probability variation result, and“ 24 to 29 ”corresponds to the 16R normal result.

  Here, the probability variation result in the present embodiment is a result obtained when the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. In addition, the normal winning result is a winning result when the success / failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode (maintains) and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. However, the high-frequency support mode in the normal hit result ends when the number of games reaches the end reference number (100 in this embodiment) after the transition, and shifts to the low-frequency support mode.

  In addition, although mentioned later concretely, the high frequency support mode is a mode in which the electric accessory 63 is easily opened, and the low frequency support mode is a mode in which the electric accessory 63 is difficult to open.

In the control of the variable winning device 56 in the opening / closing execution mode, a round game with an upper limit of a predetermined number of times is executed. In addition, round game means a predetermined opening duration (
The game continues until either one of the following conditions is satisfied: the release duration) elapses, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the big prize opening 56a. For example, the opening duration is set to 30 sec, and the upper limit number is set to 10.

  In the present embodiment, in a situation where the operation handle 31 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 44 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec. In this case, in each round game, an opening continuation time longer than the product of the launch period of the game balls and the maximum number of winning game balls in one round game is set. Therefore, in each round game, it is expected that the maximum number of winnings in one round game will be generated at the big winning opening 56a.

  Here, the various winning results described in FIG. 18 will be described. The “4R probability variation winning result” is a game result in which the big winning opening 56a is opened four times. The “16R certain variation winning result and 16R normal winning result” "Is a game result in which the special winning opening 56a is opened 16 times.

  And, as described above, in this embodiment, the distribution mode of the game result when winning the winning lottery is the case where winning the winning lottery is triggered by winning the first starting port 54, This is different from the case where the winning at the second start opening 55 is a win for the lottery. Specifically, the probability of winning per 16R probability change with a win at the first start port 54 is lower than the probability of winning per 16R probability change with a win at the second start port 55. The 16R probability variation result can be said to be the most advantageous result because the special winning opening 56a is opened 16 times in a long-time manner. In other words, the probability that the player can obtain many balls is higher in the case of winning the winning at the second start opening 55.

  The “high probability mode” means a state in which the probability of winning the subsequent winning lottery as an added value after winning is increased, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, the opening / closing execution mode ( It is a state of a game that can easily shift to a special game. The high probability mode (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of winning a normal symbol is increased and the game ball is likely to win the second starting port 55. “Low probability mode” refers to a case where the mode is not a high probability mode (when the probability change is not in progress), and means that the probability of winning a winning lottery is normal, that is, a state where the probability of winning a winning lottery is lower than when the probability changes. .

  In addition, as a support mode in the electric accessory 63, when compared with a situation in which game balls are continuously being emitted in the same manner with respect to the game area, the electric accessory 63 is opened per unit time. A high frequency support mode (high frequency support mode or high frequency guide mode) and a low frequency support mode (low frequency support mode or low frequency guide mode) are set so that the frequency becomes relatively high and low.

  Specifically, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric-powered item opening state in the electric-powered item opening lottery using the electric-powered item opening random number counter C4. There is a higher probability that the mode will be elected in the open state of the electric utility item than in the low frequency support mode. In addition, when the electrified state of the electrified electrical component is won, the high frequency support mode has a higher number of times that the electrified feature 63 is opened when the electrified state of the electrified state is elected than in the low frequency support mode. It is set, and the opening time for one time is set longer. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric accessory is in an open state and the open state of the electric accessory 63 occurs a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time.

For this reason, in the high frequency support mode, it is easy to win a game ball at the second start port 55, and when a game ball wins the second start port 55, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the ball.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high-frequency support mode is set to the open state of the electric-powered object per unit time as compared with the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. The probability of winning the electrified state in the lottery may be set equal, and the number of times of opening and the opening time may be set as appropriate, and may be changed as appropriate.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55. Then, it is used to determine whether or not to generate reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area 113c of the main ROM 113. However, in the game times that shift to the open / close execution mode, the main MPU 112 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display is the same in each gaming state in the present embodiment, but may be set individually according to the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display may be set larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, reach display is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 80. The reach display includes a symbol display device 80 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and in the game times that are the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 56, the stop display result after the variable display. In a game machine in which a special display result is obtained, a change that tends to become a special display result at a stage before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 80 is started. It is a display state for making a player think that it is in a display state.

  Specifically, the reach display means that a winning occurs by stopping and displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80 (open / close execution mode). Is a display state that displays the combination of the main symbols (reach symbols) that may have a winning symbol combination corresponding to the is there.

  More specifically, as a step before ending the variable display of symbols, a combination of winning symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is established on a preset active line in the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of main symbols (reach symbols) that may be displayed, and a symbol change display is performed by a final stop symbol sequence in a situation where the reach line is formed. .

More specifically, with reference to FIG. 6, in the pachinko machine 10, the symbol variation display is first terminated in the upper symbol row Z1, and the symbol variation display is further terminated in the lower symbol row Z3. , The same number on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, or the main symbol with the number “3” added to the upper symbol row Z1 and the number “1” to the lower symbol row Z3 of the effective line L2 As a result, a reach line is formed, and in a state where the reach line is formed, the symbol display is performed in the middle symbol row Z2 (final stop symbol row), thereby achieving reach display. When the open / close execution mode occurs, the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are displayed in such a manner that the main symbols having the same numbers as the main symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line. The change display of is terminated.

  In the reach display, the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, and the change of symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. There are those that produce an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire display screen 80a after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS includes a variation display time (display duration) in the main display portion 71 (first result display portion 71a or second result display portion 71b) and a symbol variation display time (display duration time) in the symbol display device 80. ) In the main MPU 112. The variation type counter CS is periodically updated, and a value is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the main display unit 71 and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 80. In determining the variable display time, the variable display time table (variable display time information group) stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area 113d as the variable display information group storage means in the main ROM 113 is referred to. .

  The electric accessory opening random number counter C4 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the electric accessory opening random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the electric accessory opening random number counter C4, and the count is started again from the initial value. Be started. The random number initial value counter CINI2 is a loop counter similar to the electric accessory opening random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250). The electric accessory release random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c of the main side RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball passes the normal symbol start gate 57.

  The random number value for winning the normal symbol is stored as a normal symbol success / failure table (availability information group) in the normal symbol success / failure table storage area 113f as the success / failure information group storage means in the main ROM 113. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the number of random numbers to be won for the normal symbol is 24 in the low probability mode, and the range is “5 to 28”. In the high probability mode, the range is 200, and the range is “5 to 204”. That is, in the low probability mode, it is determined that the winning is achieved when the value of the acquired electric machine article opening random number counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, and in the high probability mode, the acquired electric machine object opening random number counter is determined. When the value of C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that the winning is made. And the predetermined lighting state is shown on the other display part 71d in the main display part 71, and the electric accessory 63 is opened.

<Various processes executed by the MPU 112 of the main control board 111>
Next, a main process executed by the main MPU 112 after the main controller 91 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the main process, which is activated by a reset at power-on.

  First, a power-on wait process is executed (S101). In the power-on wait process, a wait process (for example, a peripheral control device such as the audio lamp control device 92, the display control device 93, and the payout control device 100) becomes ready to operate. 1 sec) and waits without proceeding to the next process. After the elapse of the power-on wait process, access to the main RAM 114 is permitted (S102), and the internal function register of the main MPU 112 is set (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 103 provided in the power supply and launch control device 101 is manually operated (S104), and when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 103 is not manually operated (S104: NO). Then, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 114 (S105). If it is determined that the power failure flag of the main RAM 114 is set to “1” (S105: YES), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (S106). It is determined whether or not the checksum stored at the time of blocking matches, that is, whether or not the stored data is normal (S107).

  If it is determined that the checksum is normal (S107: YES), a power-on setting process is executed (S109). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 114 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and the current gaming state (a state before power-off when the power-off is normal) Is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 92 in accordance with the current gaming state. Also, a payout initialization command indicating that the payout side RAM 124 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout side MPU 122. Furthermore, an interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of timer interrupt processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch is turned on (S104: YES), when it is determined that the power failure flag is not set to “1” (S105: NO), or it is determined that the checksum is not normal. In the case (S107: NO), the main-side RAM 114 is cleared as the initialization of the main-side RAM 114 (S108), and then the power-on setting process in step 109 is performed.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the game hall is started, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 103 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 103 is pressed, the process proceeds to S108. Similarly, when the occurrence information of power shutdown is not set, or when abnormality of data stored and held by the checksum is confirmed, the process proceeds to step 108 in the same manner.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 103 has not been pressed, step 108 is executed without executing step 108, provided that the power failure flag is set to “1” and that the checksum is normal. 109 is executed. In other words, if the power supply is normally shut off and the checksum is normal, a command for returning to the power-off gaming state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 92.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the following residual process. That is, the main MPU 112 is configured to periodically execute a timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) to be described later, but a remaining time is generated between a certain timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the following remaining processes are repeatedly executed using this irregular time. That is, it can be said that the following remaining processes are non-periodic processes executed irregularly.

In the remaining processing, first, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit generation of timer interrupt processing (S110). Subsequently, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counters CINI1 and CINI2 is executed (S111), and a change counter update process for updating the change type counter CS is executed (S112). In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 114, and the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read-out counter is executed. in this case,
When the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to “0”. Thereafter, an interrupt permission setting is made to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted (S113). Then, when the process of step 113 is executed, the process returns to step 110, and after the timer interrupt process is completed, the processes of step 110 to step 113 are executed.

  Here, as described above, since the random number initial value update process and the variation counter update process are set in the remaining process so as to be sandwiched between the interrupt disable process and the interrupt enable process, the timer interrupt process The timing of starting is always immediately before step 110. Then, after the timer interrupt process is completed, it is only necessary to start from step 110, and the return address after the timer interrupt process is unambiguous. Therefore, it is not necessary to store the current return address at the start of the timer interrupt process, and the processing load at the start of the timer interrupt process is reduced.

  In addition, since timer interrupt processing does not occur during the calculation of predetermined data in the main side MPU 112, the main data stored at that time in the register of the main side MPU 112 at the start of the timer interrupt processing. There is no need to execute save processing to the side RAM 114, and similarly, there is no need to execute data return processing to the register of the main MPU 112 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the processing load at the start of the timer interrupt process is reduced, and the processing load at the end of the timer interrupt process is also reduced.

  In addition, since timer interrupt processing is not started during the update of the random number initial value counters CINI1 and CINI2 or during the update of the variation type counter CS, the timer interrupt processing does not initiate these timer interrupt processing. It is possible to prevent the numerical information of the counter from being acquired and further update processing from being executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, a timer interrupt process that is periodically executed by the main MPU 112 (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.

  First, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 112 will be described. The main control board 111 is provided with a clock circuit (not shown) as pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and further, it exists in the middle of the signal path between the clock circuit and the main MPU 112. A frequency dividing circuit (not shown) is provided.

  The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing unit that changes the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the main MPU 112. . That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the main MPU 112 at intervals of a specific cycle of 4 msec. The main MPU 112 executes a process for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as the rise or fall of the pulse signal, and starts the timer interrupt process with at least one condition confirming the occurrence of the specific signal form. And execute.

  In this case, when the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed in the situation where the start of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed when the interrupt is permitted from the state where the interrupt is prohibited. Interrupt processing is started. In other words, depending on the execution status of the process in the main MPU 112, the next timer interrupt process may start after 4.1 msec from the start of the previous timer interrupt process. The next timer interrupt process is started after 3.9 msec from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt process.

  However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed at a specific cycle of 4 msec regardless of the progress of processing in the main MPU 112, the timer interrupt processing is basically started at a specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 112 is such that even if the timer interrupt process at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific period since the previous timer interrupt process was started, The timer interrupt process at this timing absorbs the amount exceeding the specific period, and the timer interrupt process at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed. The above is a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 112.

  The main MPU 112 first executes a power failure information storage process (S201). In this power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power outage monitoring board 117, and when a power outage is identified, a predetermined power outage process is executed.

  Next, a lottery random number update process is executed (S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read out from the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release random number counter C4, and a process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information is executed. Later, a process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step 111 in the main process (FIG. 19) (S203), and the counter update process for variation is executed in the same manner as in step 112 in the main process (FIG. 19) ( S204). Next, a game stop determination process is executed (S205). In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped. If the progress of the game is to be stopped, the execution of the process for progressing the game is stopped.

  Specifically, various sensors such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor (other detection sensors 115 in FIG. 12) are provided on the front side of the gaming machine main body 12. Then, the main MPU 112 determines whether or not an act of bringing the magnet closer to the game board 43 is performed based on the detection result of the magnet detection sensor by fraud detection processing (S212), which will be described later. Based on the detection result of the sensor, it is determined whether or not an unauthorized radio wave is output toward the pachinko machine 10, and an unauthorized vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the vibration detection sensor. It is determined whether or not there is any. If an affirmative determination is made in any of these fraud determinations, the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped, assuming that a specific event corresponding to an illegal act on the pachinko machine 10 has occurred.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped (S206), and when it is determined that the progress of the game is stopped (S206: YES), the notification command is output. The process is executed (S207). In the notification command output process, a notification command is set as an output target in a situation where any specific event has occurred and a notification command has not yet been output in response to the occurrence of the specific event.

Since the notification command includes the content of the specific event that triggered the output, when the voice lamp control device 92 receives the notification command, the notification command corresponding to the content of the specific event is set to be executed. The state in which the progress of the game is stopped and the notification corresponding thereto are started again when the power is turned on only by stopping the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 112, and the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 112 is started. By starting the supply of the operating power while manually operating the RAM erase switch 103 provided in the power supply and launch control device 101 after the stop, it is prevented from being executed along with the initialization of the main RAM 114. Become.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the progress of the game is not stopped (S206: NO), the port output process is executed (S208). In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the output process corresponding to the output information is executed. For example, when the information for switching the special winning opening 56a to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 56d is started, and when the information for switching to the closed state is set. The output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the electric accessory 63 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory driving unit 63a is started, and when the information to be switched to the closed state is set. Stops outputting the drive signal. Furthermore, the command set as the output target in each process is output to the sound lamp control device 92 and the payout control device 100.

  Next, a reading process is executed (S209). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  Subsequently, it is received from the prize winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a for detecting the winnings to the general winning opening 53, the variable winning device 56, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55, and the normal symbol starting gate 57. And a winning detection process for specifying whether or not there is a winning at the general winning opening 53, the variable winning device 56, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55 and the normal symbol starting gate 57 (S210). ).

  Thereafter, timer update processing for updating numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 114 is executed (S211). In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is collected and handled. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  Subsequently, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed (S212). In this fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and if an affirmative decision is made as to whether or not a predetermined event has occurred, an affirmative decision is made at step 205 in the next timer interrupt process. Set for stop. As a result, an affirmative determination is made at step 206. Note that the predetermined event is, as described in step 205, whether or not an act of bringing a magnet close to the game board 43 is performed, and an unauthorized radio wave is not output to the pachinko machine 10. Whether or not an improper vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10.

Next, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed (S213). In the launch control process, in a situation where the launch operation is continued with respect to the operation handle 31, one game ball is launched at a predetermined launch period of 0.6 sec. Then, based on the information read in the reading process of step 209, input for confirming disconnection of each winning detection sensor 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a, opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14, etc. A state monitoring process is performed (S214). In this case, in the input state monitoring process, when the disconnection of each winning detection sensor 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a is confirmed, or when the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 is confirmed, the notification is made in the same manner as in step 207 above. Execute command output processing. In the notification command output process, the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57
A notification command indicating that a disconnection has occurred in a and a notification command indicating that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state are transmitted. Further, in the input state monitoring process, based on the signal received from the payout control device 100, it is determined whether or not the lower plate 30 is full, and whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 99. If such a determination is made and an affirmative determination is made in these determinations, a corresponding notification command is set as an output target.

  Next, special figure special electric control processing for performing execution control of game times (variable display times) and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed (S215), and a normal diagram for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 63. The ordinary power control process is executed (S216). The special map special power control process in step 215 and the general map special power control process in step 216 will be specifically described later.

  Subsequently, on the basis of the processing results of the immediately preceding step 215 and step 216, the increase / decrease number of the hold information (first and second special symbol hold number storage areas NA, NB) for winning to the first and second start ports 55 In addition, display control processing (setting of output information) is performed to reflect the increase / decrease number of the hold information (holding number storage area NC) for the winning to the normal symbol start gate 57 on the main display unit 71 (other display unit 71d). (S217). Further, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, based on the round setting process (FIG. 29) described later, the round display unit 71c reflects the number of times the variable winning device 56 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode. Display control processing (output information setting). Further, when the open / close execution mode ends, display control processing (setting of output information) for erasing (extinguishing) the display of the round display unit 71c is performed.

  Next, in a situation where neither the game times nor the opening / closing execution mode is executed, a demonstration display process is executed for setting the display content of the symbol display device 80 for standby display (S218). The demonstration display process will be specifically described later.

  Then, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout-side MPU 122 are confirmed, and a payout state reception process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (S219). Also, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (S220).

  Next, the state of the signal output to the external output terminal board 104 is switched so as to control the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process. External information setting processing is executed (S221).

  After the external process information setting process in step 221 is completed, or after the notification command output process in step 207 is completed, an interrupt end declaration is set (S222). In the main MPU 112, once timer interrupt processing is started, it is stipulated that an interrupt end declaration is set as one of the conditions for starting the next timer interrupt processing. Set the interrupt end declaration to enable the timer interrupt processing. Next, interrupt permission is set (S223). In the main MPU 112, once the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt prohibition state is set. Therefore, in step 223, an interrupt permission is set to enable execution of the next timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  Next, the special figure special power control process of step 215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing special figure special electric control processing.

In the special figure special electric control process, when the winning information to the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 is generated, a process for acquiring the holding information is executed and the holding information is stored. A determination for whether or not the hold information is true is made, and further, a process for performing an effect for the game round is executed using the decision as to whether or not the information is appropriate. Further, based on the result of the determination as to whether or not the game has been performed, a process of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode after the effect for the game is executed, and a process during the opening / closing execution mode and at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  Specifically, first, hold information acquisition processing is executed (S301). Here, the hold information acquisition process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a hold information acquisition process.

  The hold information acquisition process determines whether a game ball has won the first start port 54 or the second start port 55, and if the game ball has won the first start port 54 or the second start port 55, This is a process of storing the acquired counter values in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 114b up to the upper limit number of reservations (maximum of four for each of the first start port 54 and the second start port 55, and a maximum of eight in total). In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the winning is stored in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 114b, the determination result of the success / failure, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. are predicted in advance based on each stored counter value. It is processing to do.

  First, it is determined from the detection information of the winning detection sensor 54a whether or not the game ball has won (start winning) at the first starting port 54 (S401). When it is determined that the game ball has won the first start opening 54 (start winning is received) (S401: YES), the value of the number of reservations Na stored in the first special symbol reservation number storage area NA is read out, It is determined whether or not the acquired hold number Na is less than 4 (S402). That is, it is determined whether it is less than 4 which is the upper limit value of the number of holds for the first start port 54 (that is, whether the hold number is stored up to the upper limit value).

  If it is determined that the acquired reserved number Na is less than four (S402: YES), the reserved number Na in the first special symbol reserved number storage area NA is incremented by 1 and the total reserved number storage area NX. Is read, and the total holding number Nx is incremented by 1 (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired hold number Na is 4 (S402: NO), the acquisition process of the hold information is terminated as it is.

  After the process of step 403 is completed, numerical information (special information) of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step 202 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20), the first start Information indicating that the winning of the mouth 54 is triggered is stored in the holding area corresponding to the holding number Na added by 1 in step 403 in the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA (S404).

  After that, the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are made to recognize that a winning at the first start port 54 has occurred, and a hold command setting process that is a process for executing a hold notification is executed (S405). ).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the first start port 54 (S401: NO), it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second start port 55 (start win). (S406). Then, if it is determined that the game ball has won the second start opening 55 (the start win has been received) (S406: YES), processing similar to Step 402 to Step 405 is performed (S407 to S410). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the second start opening 55 (S406: NO), the acquisition processing of the hold information is terminated as it is.

In addition, since the process of step 407 to step 410 is different from the process of step 402 to step 405 only in the process for winning the second start port 55, detailed description thereof is omitted. In step 407, the second special symbol reservation number storage area NB
In step 408, 1 is added to the holding number Nb in the second special symbol holding number storage area NB and 1 is added to the total holding number Nx in the total holding number storage area NX. In step 409, the numerical information (special information) of the counters C1 to C3 and information indicating that the winning to the second starting port 55 is triggered are stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area RB. In 408, the value is stored in the reserved area corresponding to the reserved number Nb added by 1.

  The above is the hold information acquisition process. Returning to the description of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 21), after executing the holding information acquisition process in step 301, the special figure special electric counter information is obtained from the special figure special electric counter area 114d provided in the main RAM 114. A reading process is executed (S302). Further, a process for reading the special figure special power address table from the special figure special electric address table storage area 113g of the main ROM 113 is executed (S303), and a start address corresponding to the special figure special electric counter information is acquired from the special figure special electric address table. The process is executed (S304).

  As described above, the special figure special power control process includes a process related to a game-playing effect and a process related to an opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as a process related to the effect for game times, a special figure change start process (S307) which is a process for starting effects for game times and a process for proceeding effects for game times are processed. A figure changing process (S308) and a special figure finalizing process (S309), which is a process for ending the game-playing effect, are set. In addition, as processing related to the opening / closing execution mode, special electricity start processing (S310) which is processing for controlling the opening of the opening / closing execution mode, and during special electricity opening which is processing for controlling the open state of the special winning opening 56a. Control the process (S311), the special power closing process (S312) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special winning opening 56a, and the ending of the opening / closing execution mode and the transition of the gaming state at the end of the opening / closing execution mode Special electric power termination processing (S313), which is a processing for the above, is set.

  In such a processing configuration, the special figure special power counter is a counter for the main side MPU 112 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plural types of processing should be executed. Corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, the start address in the program for executing the above-mentioned plural types of processing is set.

  The special figure special power address table will be described with reference to FIG. 23. The special figure special power counter can set numerical information of “0” to “6”. Start address information ("SA0" to "SA6") is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each piece of numerical information. In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start process, and the start address SA1 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation process, and the start address SA2 Is the start address of the program for executing the special figure determining process, the start address SA3 is the program start address for executing the special electricity start process, and the start address SA4 is executing the special electricity release process The start address SA5 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric power closing process, and the start address SA6 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric power end process. .

  The special figure special electric power counter is the special figure special electric power control in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. Corresponding to the processing executed in the processing, 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or “0” is cleared (initialized). Therefore, in the special figure special power control process at each processing time, a process corresponding to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric power counter may be executed.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible for the main MPU 112 to know which process is to be executed as the special figure special power control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. For example, an effect for game times is started when no other effect for game times is executed and is not in the opening / closing execution mode. In the process related to the production, before starting the production for the game times, it is confirmed whether the flag indicating that the production for the game times is being executed and whether the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. It is necessary to check whether or not a flag indicating that is set. In addition, during the execution of the game-turn effect, a flag indicating that the flag indicating that the game-turn effect is being executed is set and a confirmation display is set. It is necessary to check whether or not

  In addition, the opening / closing execution mode is started when the effect for the game round is finished and another opening / closing execution mode is not executed. In the process, before starting the opening / closing execution mode, it is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating that the effect for playing the game has ended is set, and a flag indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed is set. It is necessary to confirm whether or not it is being performed. Further, when the opening is being performed, it is necessary to confirm whether or not a flag indicating that the opening is being performed is set. In addition, after the opening, it is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed is set, and whether or not a flag indicating that the special winning opening 56a is being opened is set. It is necessary to confirm whether or not. Furthermore, when the ending is in progress, it is necessary to check whether or not a flag indicating that the ending is in progress is set.

  On the other hand, if a special figure special electricity counter is used, it is not necessary to prepare various flags, and information for checking the execution timing of each process is also collected. Therefore, the process can be simplified.

  In the following, using the special figure special electricity counter and the special figure special electricity address table, the special figure fluctuation start process (S307), the special figure fluctuation process (S308), the special figure confirmation process (S309), and the special electricity start process (S310) ), A special power open process (S311), a special power close process (S312), and a special power end process (S313) will be described.

  First, after obtaining the start address in step 304, a process for setting a zero flag is executed (S305). In the setting process to the zero flag, the numeric information of the special figure special timer counter (16-bit timer counter) is read from the special figure special timer counter area 114e provided in the main RAM 114, and the value of the zero flag is based on the read numeric information. Set. Specifically, when the numerical information of the special figure special electricity timer counter is “0”, “1” is set to the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “ If it is not “0”, “0” is set to the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112. For example, when the numerical information of the special figure special electricity timer counter is not “0” and the zero flag is “1”, the zero flag is changed from “1” to “0”. The special figure special power timer counter is a counter that is used by the main MPU 112 to specify the update timing of the special figure special electric counter according to the passage of time. Subtraction of numerical information is executed in the update process.

Subsequently, a process of jumping (shifting) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step 304 is executed (S306). Specifically, when the acquired start address is SA0, the process jumps to the special figure change start process (S307), and when the acquired start address is SA1, the process jumps to the special figure change process (S308). If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to a special figure finalizing process (S309), and the acquired start address is SA3.
If it is, the process jumps to the special power start process (S310), jumps to the special power open process (S311) if the acquired start address is SA4, and closes the special power if the acquired start address is SA5. The process jumps to the middle process (S312), and if the acquired start address is SA6, the process jumps to the special electric power end process (S313). And when the process of step 307-step 313 is performed, this special figure special electricity control process is complete | finished. Below, each process of step 307-step 313 is demonstrated separately.

  First, the special figure variation start process in step 307 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing special figure variation start processing. In the special figure variation start process, various determination processes are executed on the condition that the hold information is stored, and a process for starting the game times in which the variable display is performed in the main display unit 71 and the symbol display device 80 is performed. Run.

  First, the value of the total reserved number Nx is read from the total reserved number storage area NX, and it is determined whether or not the acquired reserved number Nx is 1 or more (S501). If it is determined that the total number of holds Nx is 0 (S501: NO), the special figure variation start process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of holds Nx is 1 or more (S501: YES), a data setting process is executed (S502). Here, the data setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In the present embodiment, as described above, there is a high probability that the player who wins the win at the second start opening 55 is more advantageous to the player (see FIG. 18). When there is holding information related to the lottery game, priority digestion is executed to preferentially shift the holding information related to the second lottery game to the execution area RC.

  Specifically, in this data setting process, first, the value of the reserved number Nb is read from the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB, and it is determined whether or not the acquired reserved number Nb is 1 or more (S601). . If it is determined that the number of holdings Nb is 1 or more (S601: YES), the number of holdings Nb is decremented by 1 and the total number of holdings Nx is decremented by 1 (S602). Next, the data (that is, the hold information) stored in the first hold area RB1 in the second special symbol hold ball storage area RB is shifted to the execution area RC (S603). Thereafter, the data in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area RB (that is, the hold information) is shifted (S604). Specifically, the process of step 604 is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reservation areas RB1 to RB4 to the lower area side, and clears the data of the first reservation area RB1. The data in each area is shifted, such as second reserved area RB2 → first reserved area RB1, third reserved area RB3 → second reserved area RB2, fourth reserved area RB4 → third reserved area RB3.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold number Nb is not 1 or more (S601: NO), that is, when only the hold number Na is 1 or more, the hold number Na is decremented by 1 and the total hold number Nx is decremented by 1 ( S605). Next, the data (that is, the hold information) stored in the first hold area RA1 in the first special symbol hold ball storage area RA is shifted to the execution area RC (S606). Thereafter, the data in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area RA (that is, the hold information) is shifted (S607). Specifically, this process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas RA1 to RA4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reserved area RA1 and The data in each area is shifted, such as 2 reserved area RA2 → first reserved area RA1, third reserved area RA3 → second reserved area RA2, fourth reserved area RA4 → third reserved area RA3.

After executing the shift process of step 604 or after executing the shift process of step 607, the data of the first to fourth reservation areas RA1 to RA4 has been shifted, or the first to fourth reservation areas. A shift command for causing the audio lamp control device 92 to recognize that the data of RB1 to RB4 has been shifted is set as an output target (S608). The shift command set in step 608 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 92, which is a sub-side control device, by the port output process (S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20).

  Returning to the description of the special figure change start process (FIG. 24), after executing the data setting process of step 502, the success / failure determination process (special information determination process) is executed (S503). In the success / failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area 114f provided in the main RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. judge. If it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode, refer to the special symbol success / failure table for the high probability mode (FIG. 17 (b)) stored in the special symbol acceptance table storage area 113a of the main ROM 113. Among the information stored in the execution area RC, the information for determining whether or not it is correct, that is, the numerical information on the winning random number counter C1 (the numerical information stored in the winning random number counter storage area 201) is the winning numerical information for the high probability mode. It is determined whether or not they match. If it is determined that the mode is the low probability mode, refer to the special symbol success / failure table for the low probability mode (FIG. 17 (a)) stored in the special symbol acceptance table storage area 113a of the main ROM 113. Among the information stored in the execution area RC, the information for determining whether or not it is correct, that is, the numerical information related to the winning random number counter C1 (the numerical information stored in the winning random number counter storage area 201) is the winning numerical information for the low probability mode. It is determined whether or not they match. The high probability mode flag is stored at the end of the opening / closing execution mode due to the probability hit result (FIG. 32, S1303), and then erased at the end of the opening / closing execution mode due to the normal hit result (FIG. 32, FIG. 32). S1304).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process is a winning / winning result (S504). When it is determined that the winning result is a win (S504: YES), a distribution determination process (special information determination process) is executed (S505). In the allocation determination process, among the information stored in the execution area RC, information for allocation determination, that is, numerical information related to the winning type counter C2 (numerical information stored in the winning type counter storage area 202), and winning Know the starting point information. Then, referring to the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area 113b of the main ROM 113, the numerical information regarding the hit type counter C2 ascertained (the numerical information stored in the hit type counter storage area 202). Identify which hit result corresponds to. Specifically, in the case where the winning to the first starting port 54 is a trigger, the result of 16R probability variation per unit with reference to the distribution table for the first result display unit (FIG. 18A), A hit result of 4R probability variation or a normal hit result of 16R is specified. Further, in the case where the winning at the second starting port 55 is an opportunity, the 16R probability variation result or 16R normal result with reference to the distribution table for the second result display unit (FIG. 18B). Identify which hit result of the hit result corresponds to the hit result.

  Thereafter, a stop result setting process for a winning result is executed (S506). Specifically, information on the pattern (lighting state) that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 71 in the game round related to the start of the change is stored in the stop result table storage area 113e of the main ROM 113. The stop result table for the hit results is specified, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 114. In the stop result table for winning results, information on the pattern form to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 71 is set differently for each hit result type.

  Next, a flag storing process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (S507). Specifically, the flag is stored in the storage area corresponding to the winning result specified in step 505 among the various winning result flag storage areas 114k of the main RAM 114.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the result is not a winning result (S504: NO), a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed (S508). Specifically, the information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 71 in the game round related to the start of the current change is for the outlier result stored in the stop result table storage area 113e of the main ROM 113. The stop information table is specified, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 114. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the winning result.

  After executing any one of the processes in step 507 and step 508, a grasping process for the variable display time (display duration) is executed (S509). In this process, numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired, and it is determined whether or not a reach display occurs in the symbol display device 80 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game times related to the start of the current variation is a winning result, it is determined that reach display occurs. Moreover, although it is not any hit result, the numerical information regarding the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area RC (the numerical information stored in the reach random number counter storage area 203) is the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach. In this case, it is determined that reach display occurs.

  If it is determined that the reach display is generated, the numerical value information of the current variation type counter CS is corresponded with reference to the reach generation variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 113d of the main ROM 113. The variable display time information obtained is acquired, and the type of reach (normal reach or super reach) is determined.

  Note that the normal reach in this embodiment is a reach with a short variation display time, and after the reach line is formed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the interrupted symbol row Z2 is stopped as it is ( It is a so-called fluctuation of bitterness (see FIG. 6 for the symbol sequence). Super reach is a reach that has a longer variation display time than normal reach, and indicates that the player has a high expectation that a hit result will occur at the game time. For example, the reach is displayed after normal reach. The In the present embodiment, when the current game round is a winning result, the probability of selecting a super reach is higher than when the winning result is not a winning result.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the reach non-occurrence change display time table stored in the change display time table storage area 113d of the main ROM 113 is referred to, and the current change type counter CS is set. Fluctuating display time information corresponding to numerical information is acquired.

  Note that the variable display time that can be acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence variable display time table is different from the variable display time that can be acquired with reference to the reach generation variable display time table. In the present embodiment, the variable display time when no reach occurs is set to be shorter as the total number of holdings Nx is larger. Furthermore, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the variable display is performed so that the short variable display time is selected compared to the case where the number of the hold information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode is used. The time is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the variable display time does not vary according to the total number of reservations Nx and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs. In addition, the variable display time table may be set individually for each of the hit results, the case of out-reach, and the case of non-reach out-of-reach (complete out). In this case, the variable display time is allocated according to each game result.

Next, the information on the variable display time acquired in step 509 is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter in the special figure special electricity timer counter area 114e (S510). As described above, the update (subtraction) of the numerical information set in the special figure special electricity timer counter is executed in the timer update process (S211) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 20). In addition, as the effects for the game times, the variation display of the symbols on the main display unit 71 and the variation display of the symbols on the symbol display device 80 are performed. When these variation displays are ended, In a state in which the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 80, a state in which a predetermined symbol combination is waited on the active line), the symbol is finally displayed (final stop display) over a fixed time (final stop time). In this case, the variable display time acquired in step 509 is a time obtained by subtracting the fixed time from the total time for one game. In this respect, the variable display time can also be rephrased as a time before confirmation (time before final stop).

  Subsequently, the change command and the type command are set as output targets (S511). Note that the change command includes information on the change display time. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the fluctuation display time acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence fluctuation display time table is the fluctuation display time acquired with reference to the reach occurrence fluctuation display time table. The variable display time acquired by normal reach is also different from the variable display time acquired by super reach. For this reason, even if the change command does not include information on whether or not reach has occurred and information on the type of reach, the audio lamp control device 92 which is the sub-side control device generates reach from the information on the change display time. It is possible to specify the presence or absence. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred, and information on the type of reach. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred, and information that directly indicates the type of reach.

  The type command includes game result information. In other words, the type command includes information on the 16R probability change result, 4R probability change result, and 16R normal result as game result information. Note that the change command and the type command set as output targets in step 511 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 92, which is the sub-side control device, by the port output processing (S208) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 20). Is done.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is stored in the time reduction flag storage area 114g (S512). If it is determined that the time reduction flag is stored (S512: YES), it is provided in the main RAM 114. 1 is subtracted from the hour / hour counter stored in the hour / hour counter area 114h (S513). The time reduction counter is set to a specified number (100 in this embodiment) after the ending time in the opening / closing execution mode resulting from the 16R normal hit result has elapsed (FIG. 32, S1305).

  After subtracting 1 from the time reduction counter, or if it is determined that the time reduction flag is not stored (S512: NO), the display of the variation of the picture on the main display unit 71 is started (S514), and the special figure special electric counter is displayed. 1 is added (S515). In this case, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is “0”. Therefore, when the processing of step 515 is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric electricity counter is “1”. " Thereafter, the special figure variation start process is terminated.

  Next, the special figure changing process in step 308 in the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special figure changing process. The special figure changing process is a process after the special figure change start process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “1”.

First, it is determined whether or not the variable display time in the current game round effect has elapsed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 ( S701). That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 21), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”. If it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “1” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the variation display time in the current game stage effect is It means that it has passed.

  When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (S701: NO), the main display unit 71 repeats a constant light emission pattern at a constant cycle, so the update timing of the main display unit 71 (light emission pattern update) It is determined whether or not (timing) (S702). If it is determined that it is not the update timing (S702: NO), the special figure variation processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the update timing (S702: YES), update content read processing is executed (S703). As for this update content, the update content corresponding to the update timing is read from the update data table storage area 113 i of the main ROM 113.

  Next, an update process for setting the update content read in step 703 for updating the main display unit 71 is executed (S704). The process for actually updating the display content of the main display unit 71 is executed in the display control process (S217) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20). Thereafter, the special figure changing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (S701: YES), a fixed stop command (final stop display command) is set as an output target (S705). The confirmation stop command is a command for causing the audio lamp control device 92, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that it is the timing to start the confirmation display for the current game round effect.

  Then, the stop result reading process is executed (S706). In the reading process, information on the pattern mode to be stopped and displayed set in the main RAM 114 in step 506 or step 508 of the special figure change start process (FIG. 24) at the start of the current game round is read. Thereafter, an update process for setting the read pattern information for updating the main display unit 71 is executed (S707).

  Subsequently, information of a fixed time (for example, 0.5 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read, and the information of the fixed time is set in a special figure special electricity timer counter (S708). Next, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter (S709). In this case, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure fluctuation processing is executed is “1”. Therefore, when the processing of step 709 is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “2”. " Thereafter, the special figure changing process is terminated.

  Next, the special figure finalizing process at step 309 in the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special figure finalizing process. The special figure finalizing process is a process after the special figure changing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “2”.

First, by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the fixed time in the current game stage effect has elapsed (S801). ). That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 21), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is “2” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the fixed time in the current game play effect has elapsed Means that If it is determined that the confirmation time has not elapsed (S801: NO), the special figure finalizing process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined that the fixed time has elapsed (S801: YES), the determination of whether or not the game has been triggered this time is made by determining the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage areas 114k in the main RAM 114. It is determined whether or not the result is a hit result (that is, a result that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode) (S802). The various hit result flag storage area 114k stores a flag corresponding to the hit result in the flag storing process in step 507 in the special figure change start process (FIG. 24).

  If it is determined that the result is a winning result (S802: YES), the opening command is set as an output target (S803). The opening command is a command for recognizing that the sound lamp control device 92, which is a sub-side control device, starts the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. The opening command also includes information on the type of hit result (16R probability change result, 4R probability change result, 16R normal result) that triggered the opening / closing execution mode.

  Next, information on the opening time (for example, 4 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read, and the information on the opening time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter (S804). Then, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter (S805). In this case, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special figure determination process is executed is “2”. Therefore, when the processing of step 805 is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is “3”. " Thereafter, the special figure finalizing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the result is not a winning result (S802: NO), that is, when the result of the success / failure determination that triggered the current game round is a losing result (that is, a result that does not trigger the opening / closing execution mode). In step S806, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 1 or more. If it is determined that the time reduction counter is 0 (S806: NO), the time reduction flag is erased if the time reduction flag is stored in the time reduction flag storage area 114g (S807). After erasing the time reduction flag or when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter is 1 or more (S806: YES), the numerical value information of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to "0" (S808). Thereafter, the special figure finalizing process is terminated.

  Next, the special power start process of step 310 in the special figure special power control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special electricity start process. The special electricity start process is a process after the special figure finalizing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “3”.

  First, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the current opening / closing execution mode has elapsed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 (S901). That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 21), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “3” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the opening time in this opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. Means. If it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (S901: NO), this special electricity start process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening time has elapsed (S901: YES), the setting for rounds is set to set the number of rounds corresponding to the various winning results in the round counter provided in the other various counter areas 114m of the main RAM 114. Processing is performed (S902). The round counter is a counter for the main MPU 112 to specify the number of round games to be executed within the range of one opening / closing execution mode, and one round is consumed in the opening / closing execution mode of the round number regulation mode. Every time “1” is subtracted.

  Here, the round setting process in step 902 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing setting processing for a round.

  First, “10” is set as the upper limit number, which is one end condition of the round game, in a winning counter provided in the other various counter areas 114m of the main RAM 114 (S1001). The winning counter is a counter that is decremented by “1” every time a game ball is won into the big winning opening 56a.

  Next, by determining the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage areas 114k in the main RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the special electricity start process is a 16R probability change hit result. (S1002). If it is determined that the result is not the 16R probability variation result (S1002: NO), it is determined whether the result is a 16R normal result (S1003).

  When it is determined that the result is a 16R probability change result (S1002: YES), and when it is determined that the result is a normal 16R result (S1003: YES), after setting “16” in the round counter (S1004), this End the setting process for round. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result is not the 16R normal hit result (S1003: NO), since the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage area 114k indicate the 4R probability change hit result, “4” is displayed in the round counter. Is set (S1005), the setting process for this round is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the special electricity starting process (FIG. 28), after finishing the round setting process in step 902, the first prize opening 56a corresponding to the winning result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is opened. Information on the duration is read (S903). In the present embodiment, the first opening duration is all set to a long time mode. Then, the read opening duration is set in a special figure special timer counter (S904).

  Next, an opening setting process for opening the special winning opening 56a is executed (S905). In the opening setting process, “1” is set in the register related to the special winning opening 56 a in the main MPU 112. As a result, in the port output process of step 208 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 20), the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 56d is started to switch the special winning opening 56a to the open state.

  Subsequently, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter (S906). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special electric power start process is executed is “3”, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “4” when the process of step 906 is executed. Become. Thereafter, the special electricity start process is terminated.

  Next, the special electric power release opening process of step 311 in the special figure special electric power control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the special electric release opening process. The special electricity release process is a process after the special electricity start process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “4”.

First, by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the open duration in the current round game has passed (S1101). That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 21), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”. If it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “4” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the open duration in the current round game has passed. Means.

  If it is determined that the opening duration has elapsed (S1101: YES), the round counter is decremented by 1 (S1102). Subsequently, the closing time (for example, 1 sec) information stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read, and the closing time setting process is performed in which the closing time information is set in the special figure special timer counter (S1103). Then, a closing setting process for closing the special winning opening 56a is executed (S1104). In the closing setting process, “0” is set in the register related to the special winning opening 56a in the main MPU 112. Thereby, in the port output process of step 208 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 20), the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 56d is stopped in order to switch the special winning opening 56a to the closed state.

  Next, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter (S1105). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special electric release opening process is executed is “4”, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter when the process of step 1105 is executed is “5”. Become. Thereafter, the special electric power release opening process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening continuation time has not elapsed (S1101: NO), it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the big winning opening 56a based on the detection information from the winning detection sensor 56c (S1106). ), When it is determined that there is no winning in the special winning opening 56a (S1106: NO), the special electric power releasing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a prize at the big prize opening 56a (S1106: YES), the prize counter is decremented by 1 (S1107). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the winning counter is “0” (S1108). If it is determined that the winning counter is “0” (S1108: YES), this processing is executed after the processing of step 1102 to step 1105 is executed. End the special electricity release process. On the other hand, if it is not “0” (S1108: NO), this special electric power release opening process is terminated.

  Next, the special electricity closing process in step 312 in the special figure special electricity control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the special electric power closing process. The special electricity closing process is a process after the special electricity release process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “5”.

  First, it is determined whether or not the round counter is “0” (S1201). If the round counter is not “0” (S1201: NO), whether or not the closing time has elapsed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 It is determined whether or not (S1202). That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 21), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”. If it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “5” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the closing time has elapsed. When it is determined that the closing time has not elapsed (S1202: NO), the special electric power closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the closing time has elapsed (S1202: YES), “10” is set to the winning counter (S1203). Subsequently, a reading process of the opening duration time is executed (S1204). Specifically, by determining the flag stored in the various hit result flag storage area 114k, the result of the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is specified, and the value of the round counter is read out, based on these The information on the duration for which the special winning opening 56a is opened is read out. In the present pachinko machine 10, all rounds in each hit result are set to have an open duration corresponding to the long-time mode. Then, the read information of the opening duration is set in the special figure special timer counter (S1205).

  Subsequently, an opening setting process is executed (S1206). The processing content of the opening setting process is the same as the opening setting process in step 905 in the special electricity start process (FIG. 28). Next, the special figure special electricity counter is decremented by 1 (S1207). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special electric power closing process is executed is “5”, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “4” when the process of step 1207 is executed. It becomes. Thereafter, the special electric power closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the round counter is “0” (S1201: YES), the ending command is set as an output target (S1208). The ending command is a command for causing the audio lamp control device 92, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for ending. The ending command also includes information on the type of hit result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode.

  Next, the information of the ending time (for example, 6 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read, and the information of the ending time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter (S1209). Subsequently, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter (S1210). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure closing process is executed is “5”, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is “6” when the process of step 1210 is executed. " Thereafter, the special electric power closing process is terminated.

  Next, the special electric power end process of step 313 in the special graphic special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the special electricity ending process. The special electric power end process is a process after the special electric power closing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “6”.

  First, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 (S1301). That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 21), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”. If it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation in which the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “6” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (S1301: NO), the special electricity ending process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (S1301: YES), the type of hit result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode that has been completed this time is set to the various hit result flag storage area 114k in the main RAM 114. To determine whether or not the result is a probability change result (S1302). When it is determined that the result is a probability variation result (16R probability variation result or 4R probability variation result) (S1302: YES), a high probability mode flag is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area 114f of the main RAM 114. If not stored, the high probability mode flag is stored (S1303). On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning result that has caused the transition to the opening / closing execution mode ended this time is not a probable winning result (16R normal winning result) (S1302: NO), the high probability mode flag is stored. If the time probability flag is deleted (S1304), the time reduction flag is stored in the time reduction flag storage area 114g of the main RAM 114 (if the time reduction flag is already stored, it is maintained as it is) and the time reduction is performed. “100” is set in the time-count counter in the number counter area 114h (S1305). In the processing in step 1303 or step 1305, flags indicating information corresponding to the type of winning result are also deleted from the various winning result flag storage areas 114k. After executing the processing of step 1303 or step 1305, the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0” (S1306), and this special electricity termination processing is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special power control process is executed using the special figure special electric counter, the special figure special electric address table, and the special figure special electric timer counter. For this reason, when the main MPU 112 identifies which situation is in a series of game flows composed of a game-playing effect and an opening / closing execution mode, a special figure special electric power counter may be referred to. Thus, there is no need to check a plurality of flags at each processing timing. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Further, in each process of step 307 to step 313, when the situation corresponding to the process ends, the process of updating the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter to the one corresponding to the subsequent situation is executed. As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide a dedicated process for making a transition to the next situation after a certain situation is completed, thereby simplifying the processing configuration.

  In addition, “0”, which is the initial value of the special figure special electricity counter, corresponds to the first situation in a series of gaming situations composed of the effects for game times and the opening / closing execution mode. Thereby, even after the initialization of the main RAM 114, etc., it is possible to be the first situation in the series of gaming situations without specially setting the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter.

  In addition, when updating the special figure special electricity counter, any one of 1 subtraction, 1 addition, and “0” clear may be performed, so that the processing related to the update can be simplified.

  In addition, the process for acquiring the hold information that can occur in any of the above-described series of game situations is set separately from the processes in Steps 307 to 313. Refer to the special figure special electricity counter. Are not included in each process executed. Thereby, it is not necessary to follow the situation in which the setting of the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter occurs at the same time, and the processing configuration using the numerical information is simplified.

  Of the processes in steps 307 to 313, in the process in which the period is measured in order to determine the end condition of the corresponding situation, the period of the period is determined by using a common period measuring unit called a special figure special electricity timer counter. Measurement is performed. Thereby, the storage capacity of the main RAM 114 can be reduced. In addition, since the situation corresponding to each process using the special figure special electric timer counter does not occur at the same time, even if the special figure special electric timer counter is used in common, the timer counter is simultaneously referred to in a plurality of situations. In other words, the processing configuration for using the special figure special electric timer counter is not complicated.

  Further, the process of updating the special figure special electricity timer counter is executed in the timer update process in step 211 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) set as a process different from steps 307 to 313. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the processing for updating the special figure special electricity timer counter is individually set for each processing of Step 307 to Step 313.

Further, whether or not the special figure special electricity timer counter is “0” is confirmed collectively at step 305 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 21). In each of the processes from step 308 to step 313, The passage of each time is determined by checking the zero flag of the main MPU 112.
Thereby, in each process of step 308 to step 313, compared with the case where the numerical information is read from the special figure special electricity timer counter of the main RAM 114 and it is determined whether or not the numerical information is “0”. The processing configuration can be simplified.

  Here, the special power special figure counter is also referred to in order to confirm which state is in a series of games composed of the effects for game times and the opening / closing execution mode in processes other than the special figure special electric control processing. The For example, in the demo display process executed in step 218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20), the special electricity special figure counter is referred to, and the demo display process will be described later.

  Next, the ordinary power transmission control process executed in step 216 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the ordinary power transmission control process.

  In the ordinary figure / electric power control process, when a winning to the ordinary symbol start gate 57 occurs, a process for obtaining the ordinary symbol hold information is executed and the ordinary symbol hold information is stored. Then, the holding information is subjected to the opening determination of the electric accessory 63, and further, the opening determination is used as a trigger to perform the process for performing the effect for the normal symbol. Moreover, the process which opens and closes the electrically-driven accessory 63 is performed based on the result of open determination.

  Specifically, first, the process for acquiring the normal symbol hold information is executed (S1401). In the acquisition process, on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start gate 57, the numerical value information of the electric accessory release random number counter C4 (that is, the normal symbol hold information) is stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 114c. Execute the process. In addition, acquisition of the holding information of the normal symbol is performed within the range of the upper limit value of holding (four in this embodiment).

  Next, a process of reading the information of the general-purpose power counter from the general-purpose power counter area 114i of the main RAM 114 is executed (S1402), and the general-purpose power address table storage area 113h of the main-side ROM 113 is read. A process of reading information in the address table is executed (S1403). And the process which acquires the start address corresponding to the information of a general-purpose / electric power counter from a general-purpose / electric power address table is performed (S1404).

  The processing contents of Step 1402 to Step 1404 will be described. As described above, the ordinary map / electric power control process includes a process related to the effect for the ordinary map and a process related to the opening / closing of the electric accessory 63. In this case, as a process related to the effect for the normal map, a normal map change start process, a normal map change process, and a normal map determining process are set. In addition, as a process related to the opening / closing of the electric accessory 63, a process for opening the normal power and a process for closing the normal power are set.

  In such a processing configuration, the ordinary power transmission counter is a counter for the main MPU 112 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plural types of processing should be executed. Is set with a start address in a program for executing the above-described plural types of processing in correspondence with the numerical information of the ordinary power counter.

Referring to FIG. 34, the multi-purpose special power counter can set numerical information of “0” to “4”. Start address information ("NSA0" to "NSA4") is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information of the electric counter. In this case, the start address NSA0 is the start address of the program for executing the normal change start process, the start address NSA1 is the start address of the program for executing the normal change change process, and the start address NSA2 Is the start address of the program for executing the process for determining the usual map, and the start address NSA3
Is a start address of a program for executing a process during open power, and a start address NSA4 is a start address of a program for executing a process during close of normal power.

  When the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is finished, the general-purpose public power counter is triggered by the fact that the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied. One addition, one subtraction, or “0” is cleared corresponding to the processing executed in the electric control processing. Therefore, in the ordinary power / general power control processing at each processing time, it is only necessary to execute processing according to the numerical information set in the common power / electric power counter.

  According to the above configuration, as in the case of the special figure special power control, the main MPU 112 can determine which process is to be executed as the ordinary power control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. It becomes possible to grasp. Therefore, the process can be simplified.

  The following is the process for starting the normal map change, the normal map change process, the general map finalizing process, the general power open process, and the general power shut-off process using the general map / general counter and the general map / general address table. A processing configuration for execution will be described.

  After executing the process of step 1404, the normal symbol zero flag setting process is executed (S1405). In the normal symbol zero flag setting process, the numeric information of the ordinary figure electric power timer counter (16-bit timer counter TC2) is read from the ordinary figure electric power timer counter area 114j, and the numerical information of the ordinary figure electric power timer counter is “0”. ”, A process of setting“ 1 ”to a normal design zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 is executed. In other words, when the numerical information of the special figure special timer counter is not “0”, a process of setting “0” (erasing “1”) to the zero flag of the normal symbol provided in the register of the main MPU 112 is performed. Run. The special figure special timer counter is a counter used for the main MPU 112 to specify the update timing of the special figure special counter according to the passage of time. The timer in step 211 in the timer interruption process (FIG. 20). Subtraction of numerical information is executed in the update process.

  Next, a process of jumping (shifting) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step 1404 is executed (S1406). Specifically, if the acquired start address is NSA0, the process jumps to the common map change start process (S1407), and if the acquired start address is NSA1, the process jumps to the normal map change process (S1408). When the acquired start address is NSA2, the process jumps to the processing for determining the usual figure (S1409), and when the acquired start address is NSA3, the process jumps to the process for opening the power system (S1410), and the acquired start If the address is NSA4, the process jumps to the normal power supply closing process (S1411).

  In the normal symbol change start process (S1407), on the condition that the normal symbol hold information is stored, the normal symbol hold information is used to determine whether to open the electric accessory 63 and the main display unit 71. In the other display section 71d, a process for starting the display of the variation of the pattern (flashing display) is executed. In this case, when the variable display time information for displaying the pattern on the other display unit 71d is set in the general-purpose power counter, and the variable display on the other display unit 71d is started, The electric counter is updated from “0” to “1”.

  In the normal map changing process (S1408), a process for updating the display on the other display unit 71d is executed. In this case, on the condition that the change display time has been confirmed, the fixed time information is set in the normal-use normal power timer counter, and the normal-use normal power counter is updated from “1” to “2”.

In the process of determining the general symbol (S1409), a process for displaying the result of the current release determination on the other display unit 71d for the normal symbol determination time is executed, and the result of the release determination is a winning result. The process for setting the number of times of opening in the case of opening the electric combination 63 when the electric combination 63 is opened using the current winning result as a trigger is executed. In this case, on the condition that the regular symbol confirmation time has passed and the result of the release determination is the winning result, the information on the current release duration time of the electric accessory 63 is displayed as the general-purpose power timer counter. In addition, the electric accessory 63 is opened, and the ordinary power counter is updated from “2” to “3”. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that the fixed time of the normal symbol has elapsed but the result of the release determination is not the winning result, the setting for setting the electric accessory 63 to the open state is not performed, and the normal-purpose power counter is set to “ The process of clearing “0” is executed.

  In the process of opening electric power (S1410), a process for maintaining the open state of the electric accessory 63 and for closing the electric accessory 63 when the closing timing is reached is executed. In this case, on the condition that the opening duration of the electric accessory 63 has been confirmed, the information on the closing duration of the electric accessory 63 is set in the normal power timer counter and the electric accessory 63 is closed. In addition, the normal power counter is updated from “3” to “4”.

  In the process of closing the electric train (S1411), when it is necessary to keep the electric accessory 63 in the closed state while maintaining the closed state of the electric accessory 63, the process for making the electric accessory 63 open. Execute. In this case, on the condition that it is confirmed that the closing duration of the electric accessory 63 has elapsed and that it is necessary to open again, information on the current opening duration in the electric accessory 63 is obtained. At the same time, the electric power supply 63 is set in an open state, and the general electric power counter is updated from “4” to “3”. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the electric appliance 63 has been closed for a while, but it is not necessary to open the electric accessory 63 again, the setting for making the electric accessory 63 open is not performed. The process of clearing the figure ordinary power counter to “0” is executed.

  If any one of steps 1407 to 1411 is executed, the ordinary power transmission control process is terminated.

  As described above, the general map power control process is executed using the general map general power counter, the general map general power address table, and the general map general power timer counter. When the main MPU 112 identifies the situation in a series of game flows composed of the opening and closing of the object 63, it is sufficient to refer to the general power counter, and a plurality of flags are set as in the past. There is no need to check each processing timing. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  In addition, when updating the ordinary power counter, any one of 1 subtraction, 1 addition, and “0” clear may be performed, so that the processing related to the update can be simplified. In addition, since the normal symbol zero flag is used in the same manner as the zero flag in the case of the special figure special electric control process, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Next, the demonstration display process executed in step 218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the display process for demonstration.

  First, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electricity counter is “0” (S1501). The case where the special figure special electricity counter is “0” means that the game round effect has not been executed and is not in the opening / closing execution mode.

Here, in the configuration in which it is confirmed by the presence / absence of a flag that a game-playing effect is being executed as in the prior art, and the presence / absence of a flag is confirmed by the presence / absence of a flag. It is necessary to read the flag information from the main RAM 114 and check the information, and then read the other flag information from the main RAM 114 to check the information. Then, it is necessary to perform address designation to the main RAM 114 at least twice, and to perform data setting processing for the register when data is transferred to the main RAM 114 at least twice. On the other hand, by using the special figure special power counter, the address designation to the main RAM 114 is only once, and further, the data setting processing to the register when data is transferred is only once. . Therefore, the process can be simplified.

  If it is determined that the special figure special power counter is not “0” (S1501: NO), the demonstration display process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the special figure special power counter is “0” (S1501). : YES), it is determined whether or not a demo display state is set (S1502).

  The demonstration display state means a state in which a demonstration display (that is, a standby display) has already been performed on the symbol display device 80, and the demonstration display flag is stored in the other various flag storage areas 114n of the main RAM 114. It is a state of being. Also, the demonstration display is a predetermined demonstration display waiting time (for example, after the ending time of the previous opening / closing execution mode has been completed after the final time has elapsed after displaying the result of stopping the previous game times) , 0.1 sec), an image of a start waiting effect is displayed in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, and an effect corresponding to that is performed by the illumination unit 33 and the speaker unit 34. Say.

  In the demonstration display in the symbol display device 80, an image in which the symbol displayed on the active line performs a predetermined operation is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the symbol is a predetermined symbol. It may be configured such that a maker name, a model name, or a moving image with a predetermined character is displayed after or instead of displaying an image in operation.

  If it is determined that it is in the demo display state (S1502: YES), the present demo display process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that it is not in the demo display state (S1502: NO), it is in a demo display waiting state. It is determined whether or not (S1503). The demonstration display waiting state means a state in which the measurement of the demonstration display waiting time has already been started, and is a state in which a demonstration display waiting flag is stored in the other various flag storage areas 114n of the main RAM 114. is there.

  If it is determined that the display is not in the demo display waiting state (S1503: N0), the information on the demo display waiting time stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read, and the information on the demo display waiting time is used as the special figure special electric timer counter. (S1504). Subsequently, a demonstration display waiting flag is stored in the other various flag storage area 114n of the main RAM 114 to set a demonstration display waiting state (S1505). Thereafter, the demonstration display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the display is waiting for the demonstration display (S1503: YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure special electricity timer counter is “0” (S1506). If it is determined that the special figure special electricity timer counter is not "0" (S1506: NO), the demonstration display process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined that the special figure special electricity timer counter is “0” (S1506: YES), the demo display flag is stored in the other various flag storage area 114n of the main RAM 114 to set the demo display state (S1507). ). In step 1507, the demo display wait flag is deleted to cancel the demo display wait state. The demonstration display state is canceled when the demonstration display flag is erased when an effect for game times is newly started. Next, a demonstration start command is set as an output target (S1508). Thereafter, the demonstration display process is terminated.

<Direction and notification execution control>
Next, production control and notification execution control using various output devices executed by the audio side MPU 152 and the display side MPU 162 will be described.

  First, timer interrupt processing executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at 4 msec, for example.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a main-side command storage process is executed (S1601), and a display-side command storage process is executed (S1602). The main-side command storage process in step 1601 is a process for storing the command in the command storage area 154a of the voice-side RAM 154 when a command is received from the main-side MPU 112. The display-side command storage process in step 1602 is a display-side command storage process. When a command is received from the MPU 162, the command is stored in the command storage area 154a of the voice RAM 154. The command storage area 154a is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored commands. Even when a plurality of commands are received at the same time, they are stored in the command storage area 154a. Processing corresponding to each command can be executed satisfactorily.

  Next, a main-side command corresponding process for performing a process corresponding to the command received from the main-side MPU 112 is executed (S1603), and a display-side command corresponding to performing a process corresponding to the command received from the display-side MPU 162 is performed. Processing is executed (S1604). The main-side command handling process in step 1603 and the display-side command handling process in step 1604 will be specifically described later. Subsequently, the second frame button handling process is executed (S1605). In this second frame button handling process, when the second frame button 27 is operated by the player on condition that a demonstration start command is received from the main MPU 112 (not in the game turn or opening / closing execution mode). Then, the volume and the amount of light corresponding to the operation are set for updating. Whether or not the second frame button 27 has been operated is determined by a signal from the second frame button detection sensor 27a that monitors the operation of the second frame button 27.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a notice response effect operation valid period standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 154f of the voice side RAM 154 (S1606). If it is determined that the notice response effect operation valid period standby flag is stored (S1606: YES), it is determined whether or not the notice response effect operation valid period standby timer counter is 0 (S1607). If it is determined that the standby response effect operation valid period standby timer counter is 0 (S1607: YES), the advance notice response effect operation valid period stored in the advance notice response effect operation valid period timer counter area 154b of the voice side RAM 154 The operation valid period is set in the timer counter (S1608), and the notice response effect operation valid period standby flag is deleted (S1609).

Note that the notice response effect operation valid period standby flag is stored in a display side command corresponding process (FIG. 45) described later, and the display side command response process (FIG. 45) described later is stored in the notice response effect operation valid period standby timer counter. A waiting period is set at. Further, in the operation effective period setting process in step 1608, the corresponding notice effect is based on the effect pattern stored in the effect pattern type and stop symbol storage process (S1706) in the main-side command response process (FIG. 37) described later. The notice response effect operation effective period of (conversation effect and character effect) is read from the notice response effect operation effective period storage area 153b of the voice side ROM 153, and the read notice response effect operation effective period is set in the notice response effect operation effective period timer counter. To do. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common notice response effect operation valid period for each notice effect may be set in the notice response effect operation valid period timer counter. Further, the update (subtraction) of the numerical value of the advance notice effect operation valid period timer counter set in step 1608 is executed in a timer update process (S1616) described later.

  When the standby flag deletion process of step 1609 is executed, when it is determined at step 1606 that the advance notice response effect operation valid period wait flag is not stored (S1606: NO), or at step 1607, the advance notice response effect operation valid period wait timer If it is determined that the counter is not 0 (S1607: NO), it is determined whether or not the effect unit operation valid period standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 154f of the audio side RAM 154 (S1610). If it is determined that the effect unit operation valid period standby flag is stored (S1610: YES), it is determined whether or not the effect unit operation valid period timer counter is 0 (S1611). If it is determined that the effective period timer counter is 0 (S1611: YES), the effective unit operation effective period timer counter stored in the effect unit operation effective period timer counter area 154c of the sound side RAM 154 is set to the operation effective period. It is set (S1612), and the effect unit operation valid period standby flag is deleted (S1613).

  The effect unit operation effective period standby flag is stored in a display side command response process (FIG. 45) described later, and the effect unit operation effective period standby timer counter is set in the display side command response process (FIG. 45). A period is set. In the set process of step 1612, the corresponding effect unit operation effective period is set based on the effect pattern stored in the effect pattern type and the stop symbol storage process (S1706) in the main-side command response process (FIG. 37) described later. The effect unit operation effective period read out from the effect unit operation effective period storage area 153c of the voice ROM 153 is set in the effect unit operation effective period timer counter. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a production unit operation valid period common to each production may be set in the production unit operation valid period timer counter. Further, the updating (subtraction) of the numerical value of the rendering unit operation effective period timer counter set in step 1612 is executed in a timer updating process (S1616) described later.

  When the standby flag deletion process of step 1613 is executed, when it is determined in step 1610 that the effect unit operation effective period standby flag is not stored (S1610: NO), or in step 1611 the effect unit operation effective period standby timer counter is When it is determined that it is not 0 (S1611: NO), the light emission control process for performing the light emission control of the various light emitting units including the illumination unit 33 is executed (S1614), and the sound control of the speaker unit 34 is performed. The voice control process is executed (S1615). Note that the light emission control process and the voice control process are information for updating in the second frame button corresponding process in step 1605, a main command corresponding process (FIG. 38) described later, or a display command corresponding process (FIG. 45) described later. Is set based on the information. Further, in the light emission control process and the voice control process, when the process of step 1609 or the process of step 1613 is performed (the notice response effect operation valid period is started or the effect unit operation valid period is started), The light emission data and the audio output data corresponding to the effect displayed on the display screen 80a are read from the various data table storage areas 153a, and are executed based on the read data. Thereby, the light emission control and the sound control corresponding to the effect displayed on the display screen 80a are executed. Subsequently, a timer update process for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the voice side RAM 154 is executed (S1616).

Next, it is determined whether or not the first frame button 26 has been operated (S1617). Whether or not the first frame button 26 is operated is determined by a signal from the first frame button detection sensor 26a that monitors the operation of the first frame button 26. If it is determined that the first frame button 26 has been operated (S1617: YES), the first frame button handling process is executed (S1618), and then this timer interrupt process is terminated. The first frame button handling process will be described in detail later, but the audio-side MPU 152 performs various processes according to the operation time, and during the predetermined period, the first effect unit 310 and the second effect unit 320. And the process which moves the movable thing in the 3rd production unit 330 is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first frame button 26 has not been operated (S1617: NO), the timer interrupt process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the main-side command handling process in step 1603 in the timer interrupt process of the voice-side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. FIG. 37 and FIG. 38 are flowcharts showing main-side command response processing.

  First, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received from the main MPU 112 (S1701). If it is determined that these commands have been received (S1701: YES), game result storage processing is performed. Is executed (S1702). Specifically, the fluctuation display time determined by the main MPU 112 at the start of the current game round is specified from the fluctuation command, and whether or not reach occurs from the fluctuation display time, and normal reach when the reach occurs. Alternatively, a process of specifying the super-reach and writing the specified information in the retained data area 154e provided in the voice-side RAM 154 is executed. Further, from the information included in the type command, information on which is the result of the lottery determination or distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 112 at the start of the current game round, that is, the game of the current game round If the result is a winning result, or if it is a winning result (winning the winning lottery), information on which winning result is specified is specified, and the specified information is stored in a data area held in the voice RAM 154. A process of writing to 154e is executed. As described above, the retained data area 154e is data temporarily used to execute the effects during the game rotation and the opening / closing execution mode, and the notification, and after these effects and notifications are started Is also an area for storing and holding data that can be independently used by the voice-side MPU 152.

  Next, a preliminary lottery process is executed (S1703). In the notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to make a notice display on the symbol display device 80 in the current game round. As described above, as the notice display, as already described, in the situation where the symbol display is variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display is started in the symbol display device 80, or a part of the symbol display. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol sequences, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from symbols on symbol sequences Z1 to Z3, and the background screen is the mode until then What makes a different predetermined aspect and what makes the symbol on symbol row Z1-Z3 the predetermined aspect different from the aspect until then are also included. The notice display may occur at any game time when reach display is performed or when reach display is not performed. However, when reach display is performed, it is higher than when reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. Also, in the notice lottery process, the game times corresponding to any of the winning results are more likely to generate a notice display and more likely to generate a notice display having a lower appearance rate than the game times corresponding to the missed result. A lottery will be conducted.

  Next, stop symbol determination processing is executed (S1704). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a 16R probability change result and a 4R probability change result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is displayed. It is determined as information on the result of this stop. In this case, the same symbol type and effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

Then, the process for determining the production pattern of this game time is performed (S1705).
. In this process, information on the variation display time of the game times is specified from the contents of the variation command and the type command received this time, information on the variation display time, information on the game result identified in step 1702, and An effect pattern corresponding to the combination of lottery result information in the notice lottery process in step 1703 is selected.

  Next, a process of writing the type of stop symbol determined in step 1704 and the type of effect pattern selected in step 1705 in the retained data area 154e of the voice side RAM 154 is executed (S1706). Since the production pattern includes information on the variable display time of the current game time, by writing the production pattern information in the holding data area 154e, not only information on the production pattern but also information on the variable display time. Also, the audio side MPU 152 can read again. Further, the audio side MPU 152 can grasp again whether or not the current game round is a winning result from the type of the stop symbol.

  Subsequently, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step 1704 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step 1705 are transmitted to the display-side MPU 162 (S1707). The processing contents of the display side MPU 162 upon receiving this command will be described later.

  Next, a game number updating process is executed (S1708). In this update process, a process for updating the game number counter is executed so that 1 is added to the number of digested games measured in the game number counter provided in the various counter areas 154g of the voice side RAM 154. The number of times of digestion game is the number of game times that have been digested without re-entering the opening / closing execution mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. The audio side MPU 152 can use the information on the number of digestion games when determining the contents of the production. For example, if the number of digestion games is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a predetermined notice display is easily selected in the notice lottery process. Execute the following process.

  When it is determined that the change command and the type command have not been received (S1701: NO), or after the game number update process has been executed, it is determined whether a fixed stop (final stop display) command has been received. (S1709). If it is determined that a fixed stop command has been received (S1709: YES), a symbol stop command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S1710). The symbol stop command is a command for instructing the display side MPU 162 to wait for the stop symbol corresponding to the current game time on the effective lines L1 to L5 and maintain the state for the fixed stop time.

  When it is determined that the fixed stop command has not been received (S1709: NO), or after executing the process of transmitting the symbol stop command, as shown in FIG. 38, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received. Determination is made (S1801). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1801: YES), the winning count update process is executed (S1802). In the update process, a process for updating the win counter is executed so that 1 is added to the win count measured in the win counter provided in the various counter areas 154g of the voice side RAM 154. Note that the number of hits in the pachinko machine 10 is the number of hit results (so-called consecutive hits) that occur without shifting to the low-frequency support mode after shifting to the high-frequency support mode. The audio side MPU 152 can use the information on the number of hits when determining the contents of the effect. For example, if the number of hits is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a corresponding effect such as a predetermined live-action image is displayed in the opening / closing execution mode. To be executed.

Next, an opening handling process is executed (S1803). In the opening handling process, the type of the winning result that is the trigger for switching to the opening / closing execution mode included in the opening command received this time is specified, and the effect contents in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type of the opening result are determined. Execute the process for For example, the winning result that has caused the transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is the 16R probability variation result, and in the immediately preceding game round, the symbol display device 80 does not have the same odd symbol combination but the same even symbol. When the combination is displayed in the final stop, the effect including the content for allowing the player to recognize that the result is the 16R probability variation result is determined as the effect in the current open / close execution mode. That is, in the game round effect, the winning result with low game value is confirmed and displayed, but in the subsequent winning effect, the winning promotion effect indicating that the winning value is the winning value with high game value is determined as the effect in the opening / closing execution mode. To do.

  As already described here, in the retained data area 154e of the sound side RAM 154, information on the game result and information on the type of the game stop symbol in the symbol display device 80 are stored with respect to the effect for the game turn. When the opening / closing execution mode is entered following the execution of the game times, the game result information and the stop symbol type information stored in the holding data area 154e are cleared when the opening / closing execution mode ends. . Therefore, even if the opening command does not include information on the display content of the symbol display device 80 in the immediately preceding game round, it is possible to execute the effect including the promotion content in the opening / closing execution mode as described above. .

  Further, in the opening handling process of Step 1803, the number of hits after the update in Step 1802 is specified, and an effect corresponding to the specified number of hits is set as an effect in the current opening / closing execution mode.

  Next, an opening command corresponding to the processing result of step 1803 is transmitted to the display-side MPU 162 (S1804). The processing contents of the display side MPU 162 upon receiving the command will be described later.

  When it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1801: NO), or after the process of transmitting the opening command is executed, it is determined whether the release command has been received (S1805). If it is determined that the release command has been received (S1805: YES), the display side MPU 162 indicates that the opening of the variable winning device 56 has been newly started, that is, that one round game has been newly started. In order to make it recognize, an open command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S1806). The processing contents of the display side MPU 162 upon receiving the release command will be described later.

  When it is determined that the release command has not been received (S1805: NO), or after executing the process of transmitting the release command, it is determined whether or not the close command has been received (S1807). If it is determined that the close command has been received (S1807: YES), the display is performed so that the display side MPU 162 recognizes that the variable winning device 56 has been closed, that is, that one round game has ended. A close command is transmitted to the side MPU 162 (S1808). The processing contents of the display side MPU 162 upon receiving the command will be described later.

When it is determined that the close command has not been received (S1807: NO), or after executing the process of transmitting the close command, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received (S1809). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S1809: YES), an ending correspondence process is executed (S1810). In the ending handling process, the content of the lottery mode after the open / close execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, and the process for determining the content of the ending effect corresponding to the type of the lottery mode is executed. To do. In the present embodiment, after the opening / closing execution mode, the high-probability mode is surely set. Therefore, an effect including content for allowing the player to recognize that the high-probability mode is set is determined as the current ending effect.

  Subsequently, an ending command corresponding to the processing result of step 1810 is transmitted to the display-side MPU 162 (S1811). The processing contents of the display side MPU 162 upon receiving the command will be described later.

  When it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S1809: NO), or after the process of transmitting the ending command is executed, it is determined whether a notification command has been received (S1812). When it is determined that the notification command is received (S1812: YES), it means that an event that should be notified, such as some abnormality or state change of the pachinko machine 10, has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, In order to perform the notification, a process for reading light emission data from various data table storage areas 153a is executed (S1813), and a process for reading audio output data is executed (S1814). Thereby, in the light emission control process (S1614) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 36), the light emission control of the illumination unit 33 is performed so that the light emission according to the light emission data is performed, and the sound output of the timer interruption process (FIG. 36) is performed. In the control process (S1615), sound output control of the speaker unit 34 is performed so that sound output according to the sound output data is performed. Thereafter, a notification command corresponding to the content of the notification command received this time is transmitted to the display control device 93 (S1815). When the display control device 93 receives the command, the display control device 93 controls the display of the symbol display device 80 so that notification corresponding to the notification command is performed.

  When it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1812: NO), or after the process of transmitting the notification command has been executed, it is determined whether a release command has been received (S1816). The release command is transmitted from the main MPU 112 when the event that triggered the transmission of the notification command is resolved. For this reason, if it is determined that a release command has been received (S1816: YES), this means that an event to be notified such as an abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 has been released. In order to cancel the notification, the cancel setting process is executed (S1817). Thereafter, a release command corresponding to the content of the release command received this time is transmitted to the display control device 93 (S1818). When the display control device 93 receives the command, the display control device 93 controls the display of the symbol display device 80 so as to end the execution of the notification corresponding to the release command.

  When it is determined that the cancel command has not been received (S1816: NO), or after the cancel command is transmitted, the other response processing is executed (S1819), and then the main command response processing is terminated. In other handling processing, for example, when a hold command is received, the hold command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162, and when a shift time command is received, the shift time command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162. . Thus, in the first and second reserved symbol display areas Dt and Ds and the execution reserved symbol display area Du in the symbol display device 80, the reserved information in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 is stored in the reserved area. A predetermined reserved symbol is displayed in the corresponding display area. Further, it is determined whether or not a demo start command is received, and when the demo start command is received, the demo start command is transmitted to the display control device 93. Thereby, the demonstration display is started in the symbol display device 80.

  Next, the V interrupt process executed by the display side MPU 162 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the display-side MPU 162. This V interrupt process is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle, specifically, a 20 msec cycle.

  The VDP 165 of the display control device 93, when outputting an image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 80, starts outputting the image signal from the dot at the upper left corner of the display screen 80a when viewed from the front, Sequentially output image signals to dots arranged on a horizontal line including one end, and output image signals from left to right in order from the top for each horizontal line. Finally, an image signal is output for the dots in the lower corner portion. In this case, the VDP 165 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display-side MPU 162 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot, so that the display-side MPU 162 recognizes that the update of one frame image has been completed. The output period of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this regard, the V interrupt processing can be regarded as being started in synchronization with reception of the V interrupt signal.

  However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, the V interrupt process is newly started when 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started. Further, as described above, when no data is set in each of the unit areas RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, and RG of the reserved symbol display area 167a (data indicating blanks is set), the reserved symbol display is performed. In the reserved symbol display areas Ds, Dt, Du of the display screen 80a corresponding to the unit areas RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, and RG of the display area 167a, no image is displayed or the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80 A background image is displayed.

  In the V interrupt process, first, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area 164a of the work RAM 164 are analyzed (S1901). Note that commands are sequentially stored in the command storage area 164a by a command storage process that is started when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 92. The command storage area 164a is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored commands. Even when a plurality of commands are received at the same time, they are stored in the command storage area 164a. Processing corresponding to each command can be executed satisfactorily.

  Subsequently, based on the analysis result of step 1901, it is determined whether a new command has been received (S1902). If it is determined that a new command has been received (S1902: YES), command response processing is performed. Execute (S1903).

  Here, the command response processing in step 1903 in the V interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing command response processing.

  In the command handling process, first, it is determined whether or not a stop result command and a pattern command are received (S2001). When it is determined that the stop result command and the pattern command are received (S2001: YES), the pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the stop result command and the pattern command is read from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163. After executing the data table setting process for the pattern to be written in the work RAM 164 (S2002), the command corresponding process is terminated.

  The pattern data table is necessary for displaying an image for one frame at each update timing of an image when displaying a moving image corresponding to the current game effect on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. This is a group of information for which various processes are defined. That is, in the pattern data table, an information group corresponding to each frame (frame update cycle is 20 msec) from the start timing to the end timing in the current game round effect is defined.

Here, the pattern data table will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 shows a display (FIG. 41) prompting the player to operate (press) the first frame button 26 in order to move the specific movable portion 341 (specific unit 340) on the display screen 80a after becoming super reach. FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining an example of a pattern data table.

  As shown in FIG. 41, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the variable display time of the target game times is set in the pattern data table, and the task contents are associated with each pointer information. , Information on presence / absence of command output, and information on additional data are set.

  The task content information is information set to display a video corresponding to the current game round, and unless information that does not reflect the task content information is set as additional data, In the frame, an image corresponding to information on the contents of the task is displayed. In the information on the contents of the task, parameter information necessary for instructing the VDP 165 to perform a drawing instruction in order to display an image for one frame at the corresponding update timing is set.

  In the pattern data table shown in FIG. 41, specifically, the data at the start of variation is set in the pointer information “0”, and the notice information (for example, the conversation effect or the character effect is added in the pointer information “200”. ) The data at the start is set, the data at the end of the notice effect is set in the pointer information “300”, the data at the start of normal reach is set in the pointer information “400”, and “700 Is set to the pointer information of "", and at the start of the effect unit operation effective period in which the various effect units 310 to 330 move according to the operation of the first frame button 26 to the pointer information of "850". The data at the end of the production unit operation valid period is set in the pointer information “950”, and “1” is set. The pointer information of 00 ", data at the time of fluctuation end has been set. Each piece of pointer information corresponds to a break timing such as the start of the effect, the change of the effect, and the end of the effect. Further, in the pointer information other than these, data for enabling the moving image display between the break timings is set.

  The information on presence / absence of command output is information indicating the presence / absence of a command output from the display side MPU 162 to the voice side MPU 152 and the type of the command. In this way, when the command is output from the display side MPU 162 to the audio side MPU 152 at a predetermined timing in accordance with the content of the moving image, the various light emitting units including the illumination unit 33 produce the light according to the content of the image. In addition, the speaker unit 34 can execute an audio output effect according to the content of the image.

Specifically, with respect to the pattern data table shown in FIG. 41, command data is set for pointer information of “0” in which data at the start of variation is set in the task content. Therefore, at the start of the change of the game times, light emission control, voice control, and the like are started in the voice side MPU 152 based on command transmission from the display side MPU 162 to the voice side MPU 152 (FIG. 36, S1614, S1615). In the content of the task, each of the data at the start of the notice production, the data at the start of the normal reach, the data at the start of the super reach, the data at the start of the production unit operation effective period, and the data at the end of the variation are set. Pointer information at timing before the number of frames (number of pointers) for pre-transmission before the pointer information, specifically, “198”, “398”, “698”, “848”, “948”, “998” Command data is set for each pointer information. Therefore, for the break timings other than the start of the fluctuation of the game times, command transmission from the display side MPU 162 to the voice side MPU 152 is performed in advance, and the display contents of the display screen 80a, light emission control, and sound output control are performed at these break timings. It is possible to completely synchronize with the contents of.

  The information of the additional data is set as a blank as the initial setting of the pattern data table. When the notification command is received, the notice response effect command described later is received, and the specific unit movable effect command described later is received. In such a case, a process for writing additional data is performed. When the additional data is written, the information written in the additional data has priority over the information originally set in the task content.

  Returning to the description of the command response processing (FIG. 40), if it is determined that the stop result command and the pattern command have not been received (S2001: NO), it is determined whether a confirmed stop command has been received (S2003). ). If it is determined that a fixed stop command has been received (S2003: YES), after executing a fixed stop setting process (S2004), the command response process is terminated. In the setting process for the fixed stop, a work table 164 is read out from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163 by reading a data table for stationary display corresponding to the current game round until the fixed stop display period elapses. Execute the process to write to.

  If it is determined that the confirmation stop command has not been received (S2003: NO), it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S2005). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2005: YES), after performing the setting process of reading the opening data table corresponding to the opening command from the program ROM 163 and writing it to the work RAM 164 (S2006), this The command response process is terminated.

  The opening data table is to display an image for one frame at each update timing of an image when displaying a moving image corresponding to the effect for the current opening / closing execution mode on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. This is a group of information in which processing necessary for is defined. The data structure of the opening data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table.

  In the opening data table, contents of effects during each round game and during the interval period between round games are determined from the start of the opening effect. In this case, the data during the round game is set so that the image of the loop or the last update timing is retained until the corresponding round game is completed, and similarly, the data corresponding to the interval ends the corresponding interval. It is set so that the image of the loop or the last update timing is held until. And the range of the information which should be referred in the data table for opening is switched with reception of an open command or a close command.

  If it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2005: NO), it is determined whether any of the opening command or the closing command has been received (S2007). If it is determined that any of the commands has been received (S2007: YES), the setting process at the time of opening / closing is executed (S2008), and then this command handling process is terminated. In the opening / closing setting process, the range of information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched according to the contents of the received command.

If it is determined that the opening command and the closing command have not been received (S2007: NO), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S2009). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2009: YES), after executing the setting process of reading the ending data table corresponding to the ending command from the program ROM 163 and writing it to the work RAM 164 (S2010), The command response process is terminated.

  The ending data table is necessary for displaying an image for one frame at each image update timing when displaying a moving image corresponding to the current ending effect on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. This is a group of information for which various processes are defined. The data structure of the ending data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table.

  If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2009: NO), the separate response process (S2011) is executed, and then the command response process is terminated.

  Next, another handling process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing another handling process.

  In the separate handling process, first, it is determined whether or not a notification command is received (S2101). If it is determined that the notification command is received (S2101: YES), the notification data setting processing is executed (S2102), and then the individual response processing is terminated. In the notification data setting processing, notification data corresponding to the notification content included in the current notification command is written in the work RAM 164 as additional data of the currently set data table. As a result, when the image is updated next time, the content of the notification data is reflected, and for example, a character image corresponding to the type of event to be notified is added to the effect image for game times and the effect image for the opening / closing execution mode.

  If it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S2101: NO), it is determined whether a release command has been received (S2103). If it is determined that the release command has been received (S2103: YES), the notification data clear process is executed (S2104), and then the corresponding process is terminated. In the notification data clear process, the notification corresponding to the type of notification target event set as the notification release target in the release command received this time among the notification data set in the additional data of the data table at present Execute the process to clear the data. As a result, when the image is updated next time, the notification of the type that is the cancellation target is canceled.

  When it is determined that the cancel command has not been received (S2103: NO), it is determined whether or not the notice response effect command has been received (S2105), and it has been determined that the notice response effect command has been received. (S2105: YES), the notice response effect data setting process is executed (S2106), and the individual response process is terminated. In the notification response effect data setting process, response effect data corresponding to the content of the current notice effect (operation effect) is written as additional data (see FIG. 41) of the currently set data table. Thereby, the response effect with respect to the notice effect is started after the next image update timing. For example, as a notice effect, two (two) character designs are displayed, an effect calling from one character design toward the other character design is displayed, and the first frame is displayed in the vicinity of the other character design. It is assumed that a symbol corresponding to the button 26 is displayed. When a notice response effect command is received in this state, a response effect (effect corresponding to a call) for one character symbol is displayed from the other character symbol.

The notice response effect command is a command transmitted from the audio side MPU 152 when the first frame button 26 is operated during the notice response effect operation valid period in the first frame button corresponding process (FIG. 46) described later. is there. In addition, in the data table of game times, data of contents when a notice response effect command is not received is set as the contents of the first task.
Therefore, when the notice response effect command is not received, display control is performed according to the contents of the task as it is, so that the effect when the notice response effect command is not received is displayed. The contents of the notice response effect can be arbitrarily changed. In the above description, the conversation effect is described as an example. However, for example, a new character design or a moving image is displayed by receiving the notice response effect command You may do it.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the notice response effect command has not been received (S2105: NO), it is determined whether a specific unit movable effect command has been received (S2107). If it is determined that the specific unit movable effect command has been received (S2107: YES), the specific unit movable effect data setting process is executed (S2108), and then the individual response process is terminated. In the specific unit movable effect data setting process, specific unit movable effect data corresponding to the movable effect of the specific unit 340 (specific movable unit 341) is written. Thereby, after the next image update timing, an effect (display) corresponding to the movement of the specific unit 340 is started.

  Note that the specific unit movable effect command may be transmitted from the audio-side MPU 152 when the first frame button 26 is operated during the effect unit operation effective period in the first frame button corresponding process (FIG. 46) described later. It is a command with Also, in the game times data table, data of contents when the specific unit movable effect command is not received (the specific unit 340 does not move) is set as the contents of the first task. Therefore, when the specific unit movable effect command is not received, display control is performed according to the contents of the task as it is, so that the effect when the specific unit movable effect command is not received is displayed. In addition, the contents when the specific unit movable effect command is received can be arbitrarily changed. For example, when the specific movable unit 341 moves to a substantially central portion (fourth position) of the display screen 80a, the player can specify the specific unit movable effect command. A background image that makes it easy to pay attention to the movable portion 341, an outline along the outer shape of the specific movable portion 341, and the like are displayed.

  If it is determined that the specific unit movable effect command has not been received (S2107: NO), the other corresponding process is executed (S2109), and then the individual corresponding process is terminated. In other handling processing, for example, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received, and if it is determined that a hold command has been received, display of hold information on the symbol display device 80 corresponds to an increase in the number of holds. The information to be changed is written into the work RAM 164. Since the hold command includes hold information for winning in any of the start ports 54 and 55, the display screen 80a increases the display of the number of holds on the winning side.

Also, it is determined whether or not a shift command is received. If it is determined that a shift command is received, a shift setting process is performed. In the setting process at the time of shifting, information for shifting the reserved symbol information set in each of the unit areas RE1 to RE4 and RF1 to RF4 of the reserved symbol display area 167a to the lower area side or the execution unit area RG is stored in the work RAM 164. Write. Specifically, the shift command includes information about which reserved symbol information is to be shifted. Therefore, when shifting the reserved symbol information in the first reserved symbol display area RE, the first command is displayed. Information for shifting the reserved symbol information is written in the unit area RE1 → execution unit area RG, and the second unit area RE2 → first unit area RE1, third unit area RE3 → second unit area RE2, fourth unit area RE4 → Specifically, information for shifting the reserved symbol information in each unit area, such as the third unit area RE3, is written. Similarly, when the second reserved symbol display area RF is shifted, information for shifting the reserved symbol information is written in the first unit area RF1 → the execution unit area RG, and the second unit area RF2 → first unit area RF1. Specifically, information for shifting the reserved symbol information in each unit area, such as the third unit area RF3 → second unit area RF2, and the fourth unit area RF4 → third unit area RF3, is written. As a result, the reserved symbols in the lower display area Dn are shifted one by one to the reserved symbol display area with a smaller number.

  Further, it is determined whether or not a demo start command has been received. If a demo start command has been received, a data table for performing a demo display is read from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163, and the work RAM 164 is read. Execute the process to write to. Further, it is determined whether or not a stage change command has been received. If a stage change command has been received, a data table corresponding to the display mode of the symbol display device 80 is obtained from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163. A process of reading and writing to the work RAM 164 is executed. Thereby, for example, when the game time variation display is not performed, the background stage is changed to another background stage and displayed. This stage change command is a command that may be transmitted from the voice-side MPU 152 in the first frame button handling process (FIG. 46) described later.

  Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 39), if it is determined that there is no new command (S1902: NO), or if the command response process of step 1903 is executed, a pointer update process is executed (S1904). In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated to advance by one frame. As a result, the display-side MPU 162 can grasp the processing necessary for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing.

  Next, task processing is executed (S1905). Here, the task processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing task processing executed by the display side MPU 162.

  In the task processing, first, it is determined whether or not additional data exists in the area corresponding to the information of the current pointer in the data table (S2201), and when it is determined that there is no additional data (S2201). : NO), the task data of the current pointer is read from the data table (S2202). Then, after executing the parameter derivation process for performing calculation of parameters necessary for instructing drawing to the VDP 165 in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing based on the read task data (S2203). ), This task processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the data table that additional data exists in the area corresponding to the current pointer information (S2201: YES), whether or not the additional data is additional data for the task data image. Is determined (S2204). If it is determined that the data is additional data (S2204: YES), the task data and additional data of the current pointer are read from the data table (S2205). Then, in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing based on the read task data and additional data, calculation of parameters necessary for instructing drawing to the VDP 165 is performed (S2206). This task process is terminated. In addition, as a case where the process of step 2205 and step 2206 is performed, the case where the character image of alerting | reporting is added is mentioned.

  If it is determined that the additional data is not additional data (S2204: NO), the additional data of the current pointer is read from the data table (S2207). Then, in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing on the basis of the read additional data, a parameter derivation process for performing a parameter calculation necessary for performing a drawing instruction to the VDP 165 is executed ( In step S2208, the task process ends. In addition, as a case where the processing of step 2207 and step 2208 is performed, the case where a response effect with respect to the notice effect is displayed (FIG. 42, S2106), the case where a specific unit movable effect is displayed (FIG. 42, S2108), etc. Can be mentioned.

  Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 39), after the task process of step 1905 is executed, whether or not command data exists in the command table corresponding to the current pointer information in the data table. To determine whether it is command output timing (S1906, see FIG. 41). If command data exists, it is determined that the command output timing is reached (S1906: YES), and command setting processing is executed (S1907).

  Here, the command setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing command setting processing.

  In the command setting process, first, it is determined whether or not it is a notice response production operation valid period start timing (S2301). That is, it is determined whether or not the pointer is “198” (see FIG. 41). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the notice response effect operation valid period (S2301: YES), a command to start the notice response effect operation valid period is transmitted to the voice MPI 52 (S2302), and then this command setting process is terminated. To do.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the notice response production operation effective period start timing (S2301: NO), it is determined whether it is the production unit operation effective period start timing (S2303). That is, it is determined whether or not the pointer is “948”. When it is determined that it is the production unit operation effective period start timing (S2303: YES), the production unit operation effective period start command is transmitted to the audio side MPU 152 (S2304), and this command setting process is terminated.

  Note that the notice response production operation effective period start command in step 2302 and the production unit operation effective period start command in step 2304 include information indicating how many frames after the output timing of the command each production should be started. include. As a result, even if the notice response effect operation effective period start command and the effect unit operation effective period start command are transmitted at a timing before the actual start timing, the audio side MPU 152 starts the effects on the symbol display device 80. In synchronism with the above, it becomes possible to start the target effect on the light emitting unit including the illumination unit 33 and the speaker unit 34.

  When it is determined that it is not the production unit operation effective period start timing (S2303: NO), the other command setting process is executed (S2305), and then this command setting process is terminated. In the other command setting process, a command indicating that the play of the game times should be started, a command indicating that the normal reach should be started, a command indicating that the super reach should be started, a command indicating that the variation should be ended, A command indicating that the production in the opening / closing execution mode should be started, a command indicating that the production of the round game should be started, a command indicating that the production of the interval between round games should be started, and an ending production should be started And a command indicating that the demonstration display should be started are transmitted to the voice side MPU 152 in accordance with each timing.

  In this case, a command indicating that the normal reach should be started, a command indicating that the super reach should be started, a command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode effect should be started, and a command indicating that the round game effect should be started The command indicating that the effect of the interval between round games should be started and the command indicating that the effect of ending should be started include the contents of the type of the effect.

In addition, a command indicating that normal reach should be started, a command indicating that super reach should be started, a command indicating that variation should be ended, and a command indicating that the production of a round game should be started include Information indicating how many frames from the output timing of the command should start the target effect is included. As a result, even if these commands are transmitted at a timing before the start timing of the target effect for each command, the audio-side MPU 152 synchronizes with the start of the target target effect on the symbol display device 80. It is possible to cause the light emitting unit including the decoration unit 33 and the speaker unit 34 to start a target effect.

  Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 39), when it is determined that it is not the command output timing (S1906: NO), or when the command setting process of step 1907 is executed, the drawing list output process is executed (S1908). ) This V interrupt process is terminated. In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 165. In this case, in the drawing list, an image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is a drawing target, and parameter information updated in the task process is set together. The VDP 165 creates drawing data in the frame area of the video RAM 167 according to this drawing list, and outputs a signal to the symbol display device 80 according to the drawing data created in the frame area. As a result, an image for one frame is displayed on the symbol display device 80.

  In the present embodiment, when an image corresponding to the pointer information “850” is displayed on the display screen 80a (when it is an effect unit operation effective period described later), “the button is repeatedly pressed to drop the specific movable part. The text “She!”, The design indicating the first frame button 26, and the indicator M are also displayed (see FIG. 51).

  Next, the display side command response processing in step 1604 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 36) of the voice side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the display-side command handling process.

  In the display-side command handling process, it is first determined whether or not a notice response effect operation valid period start command has been received (S2401). If it is determined that a notice response effect operation valid period start command has been received (S2401: YES), a notice response effect operation valid period standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 154f of the voice side RAM 154 ( S2402), a process of setting a standby period to the notice response effect operation effective period standby timer counter stored in the various counter areas 154g of the voice side RAM 154 is executed (S2403). That is, as described above, the notice response effect operation valid period start command is transmitted before the display of the notice effect in the display side MPU 162, but the command output is included in the notice response effect operation valid period start command. Information indicating how many frames from the timing (reception timing) the notice response effect operation effective period starts is included. For this reason, a standby period from when the notice response presentation operation valid period start command is received until the notice response presentation operation valid period actually starts is set. Thus, by setting the standby period in step 2403, if an affirmative determination is made in step 1607 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36), the light emission control process and step 1614 in step 1614 are performed at a timing corresponding to the display content of the display screen 80a. The voice control process 1615 is executed. Note that the update (subtraction) of the numerical value of the notice response effect operation valid period waiting timer counter set in step 2403 is executed in the timer update process in step 1616 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36).

When the standby period setting process in step 2403 is executed, or when it is determined in step 2401 that the notice response effect operation effective period start command has not been received (S2401: NO), the effect unit operation effective period start command is issued. It is determined whether it is received (S2404). If it is determined that the production unit operation valid period start command has been received (S2404: YES), the production unit operation valid period standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 154f of the voice side RAM 154 (S2405). Then, a process of setting the standby period to the effect unit operation valid period standby timer counter stored in the various counter areas 154g of the audio side RAM 154 is executed (S2406). That is, as described above, the effect unit operation effective period start command is transmitted before the display side MPU 162 starts displaying the instruction to operate the first frame button 26. In addition, information indicating how many frames after the output timing (reception timing) of the command starts the rendering unit operation effective period is included. For this reason, a standby period from when the production unit operation effective period start command is received until the production unit operation effective period actually starts is set. Thus, by setting the standby period in step 2406, if an affirmative determination is made in step 1611 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36), the light emission control process and step 1614 in step 1614 are performed at a timing corresponding to the display content of the display screen 80a. The voice control process 1615 is executed. The renewal (subtraction) of the value of the rendering unit operation valid period standby timer counter set in step 2406 is executed in the timer update process in step 1616 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36).

  If the standby period setting process in step 2406 is executed, or if it is determined in step 2404 that the production unit operation valid period start command has not been received (S2404: NO), after other corresponding processes are executed (S2407) ), The display side command handling process is terminated. In other handling processing, a command indicating that normal reach should be started, a command indicating that super reach should be started, a command indicating that variation should be ended, a command indicating that the production of round games should be started, etc. Is received. If it is determined that any of these commands has been received, the received command should start the target effect after the output timing (reception timing) of the command. Is included, the waiting period is set in various timer counters provided in the various counter areas 154g.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the main MPU 112 is used as a reference, the voice MPU 152 exists on the upstream side of the communication with respect to the display MPU 162, but the voice MPU 152 transmits a command transmitted from the display MPU 162. The control of the effect is also executed based on the above. For this reason, between the light emission effect performed by the audio side MPU 152, the sound effect, the first to third effect unit movable effects described later, and the specific unit movable effect described later, and the display effects executed by the display side MPU 162. A shift is less likely to occur, and an effect using each effect means can be suitably executed. Note that the updating (subtraction) of the values of the various timer counters is executed in the timer update process in step 1616 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36).

  Next, the first frame button corresponding process in step 1618 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36) of the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the first frame button handling process.

  In the processing corresponding to the first frame button, first, the value of the advance notice response effect operation valid period timer counter provided in the voice side RAM 154 is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the advance notice response effect operation valid period timer counter is 0 ( S2501). That is, in step 1608 in the timer interruption process (FIG. 36), since the operation valid period corresponding to the notice effect is set in the notice response effect operation valid period timer counter, is the notice response effect operation valid period timer counter zero? By determining whether or not, it is determined whether or not it is a period during which the operation of the first frame button 26 for the notice effect is valid.

When it is determined that the notice response effect operation valid period timer counter is not 0 (S2501)
: NO), since the operation of the first frame button 26 for the notice effect is valid, a notice response effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2502). Thereby, in display side MPU162, the response effect data with respect to a notice effect is set in the notice response effect data setting process of step 2106 in another response process (FIG. 42). Next, the notice response effect operation valid period timer counter is cleared to 0 (S2503). Thereby, even if the notice response effect operation valid period set in the timer response effect operation valid period timer counter has not elapsed, the response effect for the notice effect is displayed on the display screen 80a (the notice response effect command is transmitted). After that, an affirmative determination is made in step 2501. Thereafter, the first frame button handling process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the notice response effect operation valid period timer counter is 0 (S2501: YES), the value of the effect unit operation valid period timer counter provided in the voice side RAM 154 is acquired, and the effect unit operation valid period timer is acquired. It is determined whether or not the counter is 0 (S2504). If it is determined that the production unit operation valid period timer counter is not 0 (S2504: NO), that is, the characters “First press the button to drop the specific movable part to drop!” On the display screen 80a, the first frame button When the symbol 26 and the indicator M are displayed (see FIG. 51A), a specific unit movable lottery process for determining whether or not to move the specific unit 340 is executed (S2505). In the present embodiment, as described above, the specific unit 340 (specific movable portion 341) moves (moves) to let the player know (notify) that the game time is winning during the game time. It is. Here, the specific unit movable lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the specific unit movable lottery process.

  In the specific unit movable lottery process, it is determined from the information stored in the retained data area 154e in step 1706 in the main command response process (FIG. 37) whether or not the current game time is a win result (S2601). If it is determined (S2601: NO), the first frame button handling process is terminated as it is. That is, when the current game round is not a winning result, the specific unit moving process described later is not performed. In other words, when the specific unit movement process described later is executed (when the specific movable unit 341 moves (falls)), the player can recognize that the current game round is the winning result.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the current game round is a winning result (S2601: YES), the value of the rendering unit operation effective period timer counter acquired in step 2504 of the first frame button handling process (FIG. 46) is It is determined whether or not the operation valid period set in step 1612 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36) is ½ or more (S2602). When it is determined that the acquired value is smaller than ½ of the set operation effective period value (S2602: NO), it is determined whether or not the acquired value is ¼ or more of the set operation effective period value. (S2603). And when it determines with the acquired value being 1/2 or more of the value of the set operation effective period (S2602: YES), a specific unit 1st movable lottery process is performed (S2604), and the acquired value is When it is determined that the value is smaller than ½ of the set operation validity period and ¼ or more (S2603: YES), the specific unit second movable lottery process is executed (S2605), and the acquired value Is determined to be smaller than ¼ of the set operation valid period (S2603: NO), the specific unit third movable lottery process is executed (S2606), and the specific unit movable lottery process ends.

In the specific unit first movable lottery process in step 2604, the specific unit second movable lottery process in step 2605, and the specific unit third movable lottery process in step 2606, first, the specific unit is retrieved from the various counter areas 154g provided in the voice side RAM 154. Read the value of the movable lottery counter. Here, the specific unit movable lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”, and is configured such that 1 is added at a predetermined period, for example, 2 msec period, and reaches the maximum value. After that, the configuration is initialized to 0. Then, with reference to the specific unit movable lottery table stored in the various data table storage area 153a of the voice ROM 153, it is determined whether or not the read value of the specific unit movable lottery counter is won.

  More specifically, in the specific unit first movable lottery process, the specific unit movable lottery table that is won at 1/50 is referred to, and in the specific unit second movable lottery process, the specific unit movable that is won at 1/25. In the specific unit third movable lottery process with reference to the lottery table, the specific unit movable lottery table that is won in 1/10 is referred to. In other words, when the game times is the winning result, it is difficult to win at the beginning of the operation effective period, and it becomes easier to win as the operation effective period elapses.

  Returning to the description of the first frame button handling process (FIG. 46), it is determined whether or not the specific unit movable lottery process has been won (S2506). If it is determined that the winning has been won (S2506: YES), the specific drive unit A specific unit moving process for transmitting the drive signal to 342c and moving the specific unit 340 is executed (S2507). As a result, the specific movable portion 341 moves (falls), and the entire specific movable portion 341 is arranged on the display screen 80a (see FIG. 51 (f)). Sense that there is.

  Next, the specific unit movable effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2508). Thereby, the display side MPU 162 executes the setting process of the specific unit movable data in step 2108 of the separate response process (FIG. 42), and displays a display corresponding to the movement of the specific unit 340. Specifically, the characters “Please hit the button repeatedly to drop the specific movable part!”, The design indicating the first frame button 26, and the indicator M displayed on the display screen 80a are deleted, and the game A background image that makes it easier for a person to pay attention to the specific movable unit 341, a contour along the outer shape of the specific movable unit 341, and the like are displayed.

  Then, the value of the specific unit operation valid period timer counter is cleared to 0 (S2509). Thereby, even if the effect unit operation effective period set in the effect unit operation effective period timer counter has not actually elapsed, an affirmative determination is made in step 2504 after the specific unit moving process is executed.

  After the value of the specific unit operation valid period timer counter in step 2509 is cleared to 0, or when it is determined in step 2506 that the specific unit movable lottery process has not been won (S2506: NO), the effect unit movable process is executed (S2510). ). Here, the rendering unit moving process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the rendering unit moving process.

  In the effect unit movable process, first, the values of the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters stored in the various effect unit movable period timer counter areas 154d of the sound side RAM 154 are acquired (S2701). Next, it is determined whether or not the first effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2702). When it is determined that the first effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2702: YES), that is, when it is determined that the first effect unit 310 is not movable (not movable), the first drive is performed. A first effect unit moving process for transmitting the drive signal to the unit 312c and moving the first effect unit 310 is executed (S2703).

Next, a process of obtaining the movable period of the first effect unit 310 from the various effect unit movable period storage areas 153d of the audio ROM 153 and setting the movable period in the first effect unit movable period timer counter is executed (S2704). . Thereby, the first production unit 3
If the first frame button 26 is operated by the player while 10 is moving, a negative determination is made in step 2702.

  When the setting process of the movable period of the first effect unit 310 in step 2704 is executed, or when it is determined in step 2702 that the value of the first effect unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2702: NO), the second It is determined whether or not the effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2705). When it is determined that the second effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2705: YES), that is, when it is determined that the second effect unit 320 is not movable, a drive signal is sent to the second drive unit 322c. A second effect unit moving process for transmitting and moving the second effect unit 320 is executed (S2706).

  Next, a process of acquiring the movable period of the second effect unit 320 from the various effect unit movable period storage areas 153d of the audio ROM 153 and setting the movable period in the second effect unit movable period timer counter is executed (S2707). . As a result, if the player operates the first frame button 26 when the second effect unit 320 is moving, a negative determination is made in step 2705.

  When the setting process of the movable period of the second effect unit 320 in step 2707 is executed, or when it is determined that the value of the second effect unit movable period timer counter in step 2705 is not 0 (S2705: NO), the third It is determined whether or not the effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2708). When it is determined that the third effect unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2708: YES), that is, when it is determined that the third effect unit 330 is not movable, a drive signal is transmitted to the third drive unit 332c. Then, the third effect unit moving process for moving the third effect unit 330 is executed (S2709).

  Next, a process of obtaining the movable period of the third effect unit 330 from the various effect unit movable period storage areas 153d of the voice ROM 153 and setting the movable period to the third effect unit movable period timer counter is executed (S2710). . Thus, if the player operates the first frame button 26 when the third effect unit 330 is moving, a negative determination is made in step 2708. After performing the set process of step 2710 or when it is determined in step 2708 that the third effect unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2708: NO), the effect unit movable process is terminated as it is.

  In this way, in this effect unit moving process, it is determined whether or not the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are moving, respectively, and are not moving (not moving). ) Is determined to be moved individually.

  Returning to the description of the first frame button handling process (FIG. 46), if it is determined that the effect unit operation valid period timer counter is 0 (S2504: YES), the normal handling process is executed (S2511), and then this The first frame button handling process ends. In this normal response process, a demonstration start command is received from the main MPU 112 (not in the game time and opening / closing execution mode), or if a single game time is processed, the change in the game time A stage change command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 162 on condition that the display is stopped before a predetermined period (for example, before a predetermined period when reach display is performed). Thereby, the display side MPU 162 changes and displays the background stage displayed on the display screen 80a in the order of “underwater stage” → “beach stage” → “town stage” → “underwater stage”.

The above is the control of effect and notification in the present embodiment. Next, with respect to the display mode of the special symbol, the effective unit operation effective period, and the display mode of the symbol display device 80 when the effect unit operation effective period (first frame button operation effective period) is set in the game times, FIG. Will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the special symbol display mode, the rendering unit operation effective period, and the display mode of the symbol display device 80. In addition, T2, T3, T4, and T6 in the display mode of the symbol display device 80 correspond to each time point in the operation effective period. In the present embodiment, the production unit operation effective period is set after the development to super reach as described above.

  First, at the timing of the time point T1, when the game round in which the production unit operation valid period is set is started, the normal variation of each symbol sequence that has been stopped is started. Then, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed, and then the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed at time T2 (see FIG. 6). At this time, a reach line is formed by the same main symbol being stopped and displayed on any of the above-mentioned effective lines L1 to L5, thereby achieving normal reach (in FIG. 49, three symbols are stopped and displayed on the effective line L2). . Thereafter, the super-reach is started at a time point T3 after the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed for a predetermined period. For example, the super reach is an effect mode in which the display of the shell symbol shown in FIG. 7 (j) is deleted and the middle symbol row Z2 is enlarged and displayed.

  Then, at the time T4, when the production unit operation valid period is reached, the display screen 80a is displayed with the characters "Please press the button repeatedly to drop the specific movable part!", The design indicating the first frame button 26, and the operation valid period. An indicator M to be displayed (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as a button operation instruction) is displayed. In this embodiment, the indicator M is configured such that the display color of the indicator M changes based on the decrease in the operation effective period (see FIG. 51). Specifically, the indicator M is displayed so that the remaining period of the operation effective period is displayed in white, and when the remaining period decreases, the portion changes to black (the portion displayed in white decreases). Then, the period in which the indicator M is displayed is a period in which the effect unit operation valid period timer counter is not 0 (FIG. 46, S2504: NO), and when the player operates (presses) the first frame button 26, the first The processing after step 2505 of the frame button correspondence processing (FIG. 46) is executed in order. The movable aspects of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340 due to the player operating the first frame button 26 during the operation effective period will be specifically described later. .

  Thereafter, when the operation valid period ends at time T5, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed at time T6, and the result of the current game round is clearly indicated. Specifically, if the current game number is a winning result, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning result (the main symbol with a number of 3 in FIG. 49) is stopped and displayed. In the case of a missed result, a combination of symbols corresponding to the missed result (a main symbol with a number 4 in FIG. 49) is displayed.

  As described in the first frame button corresponding process (FIG. 46), if it is determined that the specific unit movable lottery process is won in step 2506 in the first frame button corresponding process (S2506: YES), step In 2508, the specific unit movable effect command is transmitted, and in step 2509, the effect unit operation valid period timer counter is cleared to zero. Then, the button operation instruction is not displayed by the data setting process in step 2108 of the separate handling process (FIG. 42) executed by the display side MPU 162. That is, the time point T5 is the time when the operation valid period set in step 1612 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36) has elapsed, or an affirmative determination is made in step 2506 of the first frame button handling process (FIG. 46). It will be one of the time points.

Subsequently, when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the effect unit operation valid period, the first effect unit 310 (first movable part 311), the second effect unit 320 (second movable part 321), the second The movable modes of the 3 effect unit 330 (third movable part 331) and the specific unit 340 (specific movable part 341) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 50 is a timing chart showing the effect unit operation effective period, the state of the first frame button 26, the state of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340. FIG. 51 is a schematic diagram showing a movable aspect of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340 corresponding to each time point of FIG. 50, and (a) is a time point T4. The first effect unit 310 (first movable part 311), the second effect unit 320 (second movable part 321), the third effect unit 330 (third movable part 331), and the specific unit 340 (specific movable part 341). (B) is the 1st effect unit 310 (1st movable part 311), the 2nd effect unit 320 (2nd movable part 321), and the 3rd effect unit 330 (3rd movable part 331) in time T41b. ), And the movable mode of the specific unit 340 (specific movable part 341), (c) is the first effect unit 310 (first movable part 31) at time T41d. ), The second rendering unit 320 (second movable portion 321), the third rendering unit 330 (third movable portion 331), and the specific mode of the specific unit 340 (specific movable portion 341) are shown, (d) is a time point T41f. The first effect unit 310 (first movable part 311), the second effect unit 320 (second movable part 321), the third effect unit 330 (third movable part 331), and the specific unit 340 (specific movable part 341). (E) shows the first effect unit 310 (first movable part 311), the second effect unit 320 (second movable part 321), and the third effect unit 330 (third movable part 331) at time T41h. ), And the movable mode of the specific unit 340 (specific movable portion 341), (f) is the first effect unit 310 (first movable portion 31) at time T41j. ), The second direction unit 320 (second movable section 321), illustrates a movable manner in the third direction unit 330 (third movable portion 331), and certain units 340 (specific movable portion 341). In addition, the dotted line in each figure of FIG. 51 has shown each movable part 311-331 arrange | positioned in the 1st position, and the specific movable part 341 arrange | positioned in the 3rd position.

  When the operation valid period starts at time T4, a button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a as described above (FIG. 51a). When the player operates the first frame button 26 at time T41a, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are all non-movable at time T41a (see FIG. 48, S2702: YES, S2705: YES, S2708: YES), the audio side MPU 152 executes a first effect unit movable process, a second effect unit movable process, and a third effect unit movable process (FIG. 48, S2703, S2706). , S2709). As a result, at time T41b, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are all moving (moving) as the player operates the first frame button 26 at time T41a. Middle, during displacement) (FIG. 51B).

  Next, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at time T41c, the first effect unit 310 and the second effect unit 320 are not movable at time T41c (FIG. 48, S2702: YES, S2705: Since the third effect unit 330 is movable (FIG. 48, S2708: NO), the audio side MPU 152 executes the first effect unit movable process and the second effect unit movable process (FIG. 48, S2703, S2706). ). Thereby, at the time T41d, the first effect unit 310 and the second effect unit 320 become movable as the first frame button 26 is operated by the player at the time T41c (FIG. 51 (c)).

Subsequently, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at time T41e, the first effect unit 310 and the third effect unit 330 are not movable at time T41e (FIG. 48, S2702: YES, S2708: Since the second effect unit 320 is movable (FIG. 48, S2705: NO), the audio side MPU 152 executes the first effect unit movable process and the third effect unit movable process (FIG. 48, S2703, S2709). ). Thereby, at the time T41f, the first effect unit 310 and the third effect unit 330 become movable as the first frame button 26 is operated by the player at the time T41e (FIG. 51 (d)).

  Thereafter, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at time T41g, the second effect unit 320 and the third effect unit 330 are not movable at time T41g (FIG. 48, S2705: YES, S2708: YES). ), Because the first effect unit 310 is movable (FIG. 48, S2702: NO), the audio side MPU 152 executes the second effect unit movable process and the third effect unit movable process (FIG. 48, S2706, S2709). . Thereby, at the time T41h, the second effect unit 320 and the third effect unit 330 become movable as the first frame button 26 is operated by the player at the time T41g (FIG. 51 (e)).

  Then, if the current game round is a winning result, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at time T41i and wins the specific unit movable lottery process (FIG. 46, S2506: YES), the audio side MPU 152 Executes the specific unit moving process (FIG. 46, S2507). As a result, at the time T41j, the specific movable portion 341 is moving (a state in which it has been dropped), and the player is made aware that the current game time is the winning result.

  That is, in this pachinko machine 10, when a button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a, the player can play the game by operating the first frame button 26 while expecting the specific movable portion 341 to move. It is configured to participate. Further, before the specific movable portion 341 falls, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are moved in accordance with the operation of the first frame button 26 by the player. Thus, the player's interest in the game (expectation and excitement) is improved.

  In the present embodiment, even though the first movable portion 311, the second movable portion 321, and the third movable portion 331 move to the second position and the specific movable portion 341 moves simultaneously to the fourth position, these It is set as the structure which does not collide (contact) (refer FIG. 10). For this reason, in this embodiment, even if it is a case where a specific unit movable process is performed, a production | presentation unit movable process is performed (FIG. 46, S2510). Therefore, at time T41i, the first effect unit 310 and the second effect unit 320 are not movable (FIG. 48, S2702: YES, S2705: YES), but the third effect unit 330 is movable (FIG. 48). , S2708: NO), the audio side MPU 152 also executes the first effect unit movable process and the second effect unit movable process (FIG. 48, S2703, S2706). Thereby, at the time T41i, the first effect unit 310 and the second effect unit 320 are also moved together with the specific unit 340.

  According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  First, in the present embodiment, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 having different movable periods are provided, and when the player operates the first frame button 26 within the effect unit operation effective period. The moving process of the rendering unit that is not moving (not moving) is executed (FIG. 48). For this reason, when the player operates the first frame button 26 as compared with the case where all the effect units are moved simultaneously (when the effect unit moving process is executed only when all the effect units are not movable). There is a higher probability that the production unit will move. That is, the responsiveness of the effect unit when the player operates the first frame button 26 can be increased. Therefore, the player can easily feel that the effect unit moves in response to the operation of the first frame button 26, and the player can actively operate the first frame button 26. Can improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the case where the game time is a winning result, the specific unit 340 may not move even if the player operates the first frame button 26 (FIG. 46: S2506). That is, even if the player operates the first frame button 26 and the specific unit 340 does not move, a hit result may be obtained. For this reason, even when the specific unit 340 does not move, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the production until the end of the game times.

  Further, even when the game times are the winning results, if the player does not operate the first frame button 26, the specific unit moving process is not performed (FIG. 36, S1617: NO). For this reason, the player can select whether to operate the first frame button 26 while expecting the specific unit 340 to move, or to enjoy the production until the end without operating the first frame button 26. it can. Therefore, diversification of games can be achieved, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game early.

(Modification of the first embodiment)
A modification of the first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the timing and function of button operation instructions displayed on the display screen 80a may be changed as appropriate.

  For example, a button operation instruction may be displayed on the display screen 80a at the initial stage where the effect of super reach is displayed, and the chance may be increased when the specific unit 340 moves. In this case, in the specific unit movable lottery process (FIG. 47, S2506) in the first frame button corresponding process (FIG. 46), the specific unit movable lottery process is won even if the game times are out of play. It is preferable that the specific unit 340 move with a lower probability when the number of times is an outlier than when the result is a winning result.

  In such a configuration, even if the specific unit 340 moves, the hit result is not necessarily obtained, but the probability that the specific unit 340 is movable is higher in the case of the hit result than in the case of the miss result. Therefore, the first frame button 26 can be operated while expecting the player to move the specific unit 340, and the player's interest regarding the game can be improved. In addition, since the specific unit 340 may move even if the result is a detachment result, it is possible to prevent the game effect from becoming monotonous and to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

  Further, in a later stage where the effect of normal reach is displayed, a button operation instruction may be displayed on the display screen 80a, and the specific unit 340 may be moved to super reach when moving.

  As described above, the timing and function of the button operation instruction displayed on the display screen 80a can be appropriately changed in the following embodiments as well.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment, in the first frame button corresponding process (FIG. 46), when the specific unit movable lottery process is won (S2506: YES), the effect unit movable process (S2510) may not be executed. Good. In other words, only when the specific unit movable lottery process is not won (S2506: NO), the effect unit movable process may be executed.

  In the first embodiment, when the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are moving, a predetermined effect is displayed on the display screen 80a, or from the speaker unit 34. A predetermined sound may be output.

In the first embodiment, the comparison value of step 2602 and step 2603 in the specific unit movable lottery process (FIG. 47) can be changed as appropriate. It may be determined whether or not it is 1/3 or less of the value set in the unit operation valid period timer counter.

  Further, in the first embodiment, in the effect unit movable process (FIG. 48), when it is determined that the plurality of effect unit movable period timer counters is 0, one effect in one effect unit movable process by lottery or the like. Only the unit moving process may be executed. Further, when it is determined that all the production unit movable period timer counters are 0, only two production unit movable processes may be executed by lottery or the like. According to this, when a player operates the 1st frame button 26, the probability that any production | presentation unit will move can be made still higher. When it is determined that the plurality of effect unit movable period timer counters are 0, an example in which only one effect unit movable process is executed in one effect unit movable process is specifically described in the second embodiment below. explain.

(Second Embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described. The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the effect unit moving process (S2510) executed by the audio side MPU 152 to move the effect units one by one. Since other aspects are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted here.

  The rendering unit moving process (S2510) executed by the audio side MPU 152 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the rendering unit moving process. This process is basically the same process as the effect unit movable process described with reference to FIG. 48, but is movable in one effect unit movable process with respect to the effect unit movable process described with reference to FIG. This is a process in which only one effect unit is moved when there are a plurality of such effect units.

  Specifically, after acquiring the values of the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters (S2701), if it is determined that the first effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2702: YES), The first effect unit movable process is executed (S2703), the movable period of the first effect unit 310 is set in the first effect unit movable period timer counter (S2704), and the effect unit movable process is ended as it is. That is, when the first effect unit movable process in step 2703 is executed, the present effect unit movable process is terminated without executing the second effect unit movable process and the third effect unit movable process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first effect unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2702: NO), it is determined whether or not the second effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2705). If it is determined that the second effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2705: YES), the second effect unit movable process is executed (S2706), and the second effect unit movable period timer counter is changed to the second effect unit movable period timer counter. 2 The movable period of the effect unit 320 is set (S2707), and the effect unit moving process is ended as it is. That is, when the second effect unit movable process in step 2705 is executed, the present effect unit movable process is ended without executing the third effect unit movable process.

If it is determined that the second effect unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2705: NO), it is determined whether or not the third effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2708). If the third effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2708: YES), the third effect unit movable period timer counter is executed (S2709), and the third effect unit movable period timer counter is switched to the third effect unit. 330 movable periods are set (S
2710), the present production unit moving process is finished as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the third effect unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2708: NO), the effect unit movable process is ended as it is.

  That is, in the effect unit movable process of the present embodiment, when the first effect unit movable process is executed, the second effect unit movable process is executed without performing the second effect unit movable process and the third effect unit movable process. If so, the third effect unit moving process is not performed.

  Next, when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the effect unit operation valid period, the first effect unit 310 (first movable part 311) and the second effect unit 320 (second movable part 321) are operated. The movable aspect of the third effect unit 330 (third movable portion 331) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 shows the effect unit operation effective period, the state of the first frame button 26, the first effect unit 310 (first movable part 311), the second effect unit 320 (second movable part 321), and the third effect unit 330 ( It is a timing chart which shows the state of the 3rd movable part 331).

  When the operation valid period starts at time T4, the button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a as described above (see FIG. 51). Then, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at time T42a, the first effect unit 310 is not movable at time T42a (FIG. 52, S2702: YES), so the audio side MPU 152 performs the first effect. The unit movable process is executed (FIG. 52, S2703), and the effect unit movable process is ended as it is. That is, the second rendering unit 320 and the third rendering unit 330 are not movable even if they are not movable.

  Next, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at time T42b, the first effect unit 310 is movable at the time T42b, but the second effect unit 320 is not movable (FIG. 52, FIG. 52). (S2705: YES), the audio side MPU 152 executes the second effect unit moving process (FIG. 52, S2706), and ends the effect unit moving process as it is. That is, the third rendering unit 330 is not movable even if it is not movable.

  When the player operates the first frame button 26 at time T42c, the first effect unit 310 and the second effect unit 320 are movable at the time T42c, but the third effect unit 330 is not movable. Therefore (FIG. 53, S2708: YES), the audio side MPU 152 executes the third effect unit moving process (FIG. 52, S2709).

  According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the player operates the first frame button 26, when the first effect unit movable process is executed, the second effect unit movable process and the third effect unit movable process are not executed. When the second effect unit movable process is executed, the third effect unit movable process is not executed, and the third effect unit movable process is executed only when the first effect unit movable process and the second effect unit movable process are not executed. (FIG. 52). For this reason, when the player operates the first frame button 26, the probability that any one of the effect units moves is increased, and the responsiveness of the effect unit when the player operates the first frame button 26 is further increased. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

(Modification of the second embodiment)
A modification of the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, in the effect unit moving process (FIG. 52), the effect unit having a long movable period may be preferentially moved. That is, in the said 2nd Embodiment, since the one movable period becomes long in order of the 1st effect unit 310, the 2nd effect unit 320, and the 3rd effect unit 330, it seems to make the 3rd effect unit 330 move preferentially. It may be. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the rendering unit moving process executed by the audio side MPU 152 in the modification of the second embodiment.

  Specifically, after acquiring the value of the first to third effect unit movable period timer counter (S2701), first, it is determined whether or not the third effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2708), When it is determined that the third effect unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2708: NO), it is determined whether or not the second effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2705). Next, when it is determined that the second effect unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2705: NO), it is determined whether or not the first effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2702). When it is determined that the unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2702: NO), the rendering unit movable process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the third effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2708: YES), when the second effect unit movable period timer counter is determined to be 0 (S2705: YES), and the first effect When it is determined that the unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2702: YES), each effect unit movable process is executed as in FIG.

  By performing the effect unit moving process in this way, the moving process of the third effect unit 330 having the long movable period is most preferentially executed, and the first effect unit 310 having the shortest movable period is the second effect unit. When the 320 and the third effect unit 330 are movable, the movable process is performed. For this reason, the probability that a plurality of effect units move simultaneously is higher than that in the second embodiment, and the player can fully enjoy the combination of movement of the effect units caused by operating the first frame button 26. . In addition, since the probability that a plurality of production units move simultaneously is increased, the player can fully experience the force of the production unit, and the player's first action when the button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a. The interest in the one-frame button operation can be improved, and the player's attention to the game can be further improved.

  Further, in the second embodiment, in the effect unit moving process (FIG. 52), although not particularly illustrated, the order in which the determination process in step 2702, the determination process in step 2705, and the determination process in step 2708 are performed is determined by lottery or the like. The order of movement of the various effect units 310 to 330 may be random.

  Further, in the second embodiment, although not particularly illustrated, in the effect unit moving process (FIG. 52), when it is determined that all effect unit moving period timer counters are 0, one effect unit can be moved by lottery or the like. Any one of the process, the two effect unit movable processes, or the three effect unit movable processes may be executed.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the movable periods of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 may be made equal. Even in such a configuration, by executing the above-described production unit moving process (FIG. 52), when the player operates the first frame button 26, the probability that any of the production units will move increases. However, the responsiveness when the first frame button 26 is operated can be improved.

(Third embodiment)
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment is different from the second embodiment in the effect unit moving process (S2510) executed by the audio side MPU 152 so that the same effect unit is difficult to move continuously. Since other aspects are the same as those of the second embodiment, description thereof is omitted here.

  First, the configuration of the audio side RAM 154 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the sound side RAM 154 is provided with various effect unit movable flag storage areas (movable history storage means) 154h in addition to the various areas 154a to 154g. The various effect unit movable flag storage area 154h is an area where the sound side MPU 152 stores the effect unit movable flag in the effect unit movable process (FIG. 56) described later.

  Next, the rendering unit moving process (S2510) executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the rendering unit moving process. This process is basically the same process as the effect unit moving process described with reference to FIG. 52, but can be moved in one effect unit moving process with respect to the effect unit moving process described with reference to FIG. This is a process in which when there are a plurality of such effect units, an effect unit different from the effect unit moved last time is moved.

  Specifically, after acquiring the values of the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters (S2701), whether or not there is one in which the acquired first to third effect unit movable period timer counters are 0. (S2711), and when it is determined that there is one in which the first to third rendering unit movable period timer counters are 0 (S2711: YES), there is only one whose rendering unit movable period timer counter is 0. It is determined whether or not (S2712). That is, it is determined whether or not there are a plurality of rendering units that are not movable. If it is determined that there is only one effect unit movable period timer counter that is 0 (S2712: YES), an effect unit movable process corresponding to the effect unit movable period timer counter that is 0 is executed (S2713). ). For example, if it is determined in step 2713 that only the first effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 in step 2712, the first effect unit movable process is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there are a plurality of effects unit movable period timer counters that are zero (S2712: NO), the effect unit movable flags stored in the various effect unit movable flag storage areas 154h provided in the sound side RAM 154 Is acquired (S2714). In the effect unit movable flag storage area 154h, an effect unit movable flag corresponding to the effect unit that has performed the movable process is stored in the flag update process (S2717) of the effect unit movable flag storage area 154h described later.

  Next, since there are a plurality of effects unit movable period timer counters based on the effect unit movable flag acquired in step 2714, there is a plurality of effects unit movable processing (non-production processing different from the effect unit corresponding to the effect unit movable flag). A continuous effect unit movable process) is executed (S2715). For example, when it is determined in step 2712 that the first effect unit movable period timer counter and the second effect unit movable period timer counter are 0 and the first effect unit movable flag is acquired in step 2714, the second effect unit movable process is performed. Execute. If it is determined in step 2712 that the second effect unit movable period timer counter and the third effect unit movable period timer counter are 0 and the first effect unit movable flag is acquired in step 2714, one determined by lottery or the like The effect unit moving process is executed.

After performing the movable process of step 2713 or the movable process of step 2715, the process of setting the movable period to the corresponding effect unit movable period timer counter is performed (S2716). In other words, the movable period of the effect unit that has performed the movable process is set in the corresponding effect unit movable period timer counter.

  And after performing the flag update process of the various effect unit movable flag storage area 154h of the audio | voice side RAM154 (S2717), this effect unit movable process is complete | finished. In this flag update process, if the effect unit movable flag is stored in the various effect unit movable flag storage area 154h, the effect unit movable flag is deleted, and the movable process in step 2713 or the movable process in step 2715 is performed. An effect unit movable flag corresponding to the executed effect unit is stored. Thereby, in step 2715 in the next effect unit moving process, an effect unit different from the effect unit moved this time is moved.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no one in which the first to third rendering unit movable period timer counters are 0 (S2711: NO), the first to third rendering unit movable processing is ended as it is.

  In the effect unit movable process in the present embodiment, the effect unit movable flag stored in the effect unit movable flag storage area 154h is not particularly deleted in the first frame button corresponding process (FIG. 46). For this reason, the effect unit movable flag stored at the end of the effect unit operation effective period is referred across the game times. In other words, when the game time is ended in a state where the first effect unit movable flag is stored in the effect unit movable flag storage area 154h in a certain game time, in the first effect unit movable process (FIG. 56) in the next game time. In Step 2714, the first effect unit movable flag is acquired, and in Step 2715, the second effect unit movable process or the third effect unit movable process is executed. In addition, in the first effect unit movable process after RAM erasure and the like, since the effect unit movable flag is not stored in the effect unit movable flag storage area 154h, one effect unit movable determined by lottery or the like in step 2715 is stored. Processing is executed.

  According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In other words, in this embodiment, after the effect unit movable process is executed, the corresponding effect unit movable flag is stored in various effect unit movable flag storage areas 154h (FIG. 56, S2717), and the effect unit movable period timer counter that is 0 is stored. When there are a plurality of (if there are a plurality of non-movable effect units, FIG. 56, S2712: NO), the effect corresponding to the effect unit movable flag stored in the various effect unit movable flag storage areas 154h The moving process of the effect unit different from the unit is executed (FIG. 56, S2715). For this reason, when the player operates the first frame button 26, it is difficult for only the same effect unit to move continuously, and the player can make the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330. You can fully enjoy all the movements. Therefore, the player's interest in the first frame button operation when the button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a can be improved, and the player's degree of attention to the game can be further improved. Also, by making it difficult for only the same effect unit to move continuously, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable that only a specific effect unit is movable, and to suppress discomfort to the player.

(Modification of the third embodiment)
A modification of the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, when the production unit movable flag storage area 154h stores the production unit movable flag for two times (previous and previous), and it is determined that all the production unit movable period timer counters are 0. (FIG. 56, S2712: NO) You may make it move the effect unit different from the effect unit corresponding to the effect unit movable flag for 2 times. That is, an effect unit different from the effect unit moved last time and the last time may be moved.

(Fourth embodiment)
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment is different from the third embodiment in the effect unit movable process (S2510) executed by the audio side MPU 152 and executes the effect unit movable process based on the game result of the game times. is there. Since other aspects are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted here.

  The rendering unit moving process (S2510) executed by the audio side MPU 152 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the rendering unit moving process. This process is basically the same process as the effect unit moving process described with reference to FIG. 56, but is movable based on the game result of the game times with respect to the effect unit moving process described with reference to FIG. In this process, a production unit is selected. In the present embodiment, the audio unit RAM 154 is not provided with the effect unit movable flag storage area 154h. That is, the configuration of the voice side RAM 154 is the configuration described in FIG.

  In the effect unit movable process, if it is determined that there are a plurality of effects unit movable period timer counters of 0 (S2712: NO), the data is stored in the retained data area 154e in step 1706 in the main command response process (FIG. 37). It is determined from the information whether or not the game result of the current game round is a winning result (S2718). If it is determined that the current game time is a winning result (S2718: YES), a moving process per effect unit is executed (S2719). If it is determined that the current game time is not a winning result (S2718: (S2718: NO), the effect unit removal movable process is executed (S2720).

  In the effect unit movable process, in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the second effect unit movable period timer counter is included in the effects unit movable period timer counter determined to be 0 in step 2712. To do. When the second effect unit movable period timer counter is included, the lottery process in which the second effect unit movable process is won with higher probability than the other effect unit movable processes is executed, and the selected effect unit movable process is performed. Execute. For example, in the lottery process, when it is determined that the first effect unit movable period timer counter, the second effect unit movable period timer counter, and the third effect unit movable period timer counter are 0, that is, the first effect unit 310, the first effect unit 310, When all of the second effect unit 320 and the third effect unit 330 are not movable, the second effect unit moving process is executed with a probability of 4/5, and the first effect unit moving process and the second effect unit moving process are performed. A lottery executed with a probability of 1/10 each is executed. That is, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the game time is a winning result, the second unit moving process is easily performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the current game time is not the winning result (S2718: NO), the effect unit removal movable process is executed (S2720). In the production unit removal movable process, the production unit movable process whose production unit movable period timer counter is 0 is equally executed by the lottery process.

  Then, when the per-unit effect unit movable process of step 2719 is executed, when the effect unit off-movable process of step 2720 is executed, or when the corresponding effect unit movable process of step 2713 is executed, the movable period of step 2716 After executing the set process (S2716), the effect unit handling process is terminated.

  According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game time is a winning result, and if it is a winning result, it is easy to execute the second effect unit moving process (S2719). For this reason, in the process of operating the first frame button 26 (continuous hitting), the player confirms whether or not the second effect unit 320 is more movable than the other effect units, so that the game number is hit. It can be estimated whether or not. In other words, by operating the first frame button 26 (continuous hitting), it is possible to give the player the gameability of guessing whether or not the game time is a hit result even before the specific unit 340 moves. By diversifying the game, the player's attention to the game can be improved.

(Modification of the fourth embodiment)
A modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the first effect unit movable process may be easily performed or the third effect unit movable process may be easily performed in the movable process per effect unit (S2719). That is, in the movement process per stage unit, any stage unit may be easily moved as long as a specific stage unit is easily moved.

  When it is determined that the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters are all 0 (S2712: NO), three effects are included in the effect unit movable process (S2719) and the effect unit removal movable process (S2720). The unit moving process may be executed at the same time. In this case, for example, in the movable process per effect unit (S2719), it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability that the three effect unit movable processes are simultaneously executed is higher than the effect unit removal movable process (S2720).

  Similarly, when it is determined that the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters are all 0 (S2712: NO), two effects per effect unit movable process (S2719) and effect unit removal movable process (S2720) are performed. The effect unit moving process may be executed at the same time. When it is determined that the two effect unit movable period timer counters are 0 (S2712: NO), the two effect unit movable processes may be executed simultaneously. In this case, for example, in the movable process per effect unit (S2719), it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability that two effect unit movable processes are simultaneously executed is higher than the effect unit removal movable process (S2720).

(Fifth embodiment)
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment changes the effect unit movable process (S2510) which audio | voice side MPU152 performs with respect to 1st Embodiment, and the 1st effect unit 310, the 2nd effect unit 320, and the 3rd effect unit 330 are non. The specific unit moving process is executed when the moving unit is moving. Since other aspects are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted here.

  First, the configuration of the audio side RAM 154 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the audio side RAM 154 is provided with a specific unit standby flag storage area 154i in addition to the various areas 154a to 154g. The specific unit standby flag storage area 154i is an area in which the audio side MPU 152 stores a specific unit standby flag in the first frame button handling process (FIG. 60) described later.

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This process is basically the same process as the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 36, and is a process in which a process for determining whether or not the specific unit flag standby flag is stored (S1619) is added.

  Specifically, in this timer interrupt process, after executing the timer update process in step 1616, it is determined whether or not the specific unit standby flag is stored in the specific unit standby flag storage area 154i of the voice side RAM 154 (S1619). ). If it is determined that the specific unit standby flag is not stored (S1619: NO), it is determined whether or not the first frame button 26 is operated (S1617), and the specific unit standby flag is stored. If it is determined that it is present (S1619: YES), a process of acquiring values of first to third effect unit movable period timer counters in a first frame button corresponding process (FIG. 60) described later is executed (S2512). The specific unit standby flag is stored in a first frame button handling process (FIG. 60) described later.

  Next, the first frame button handling process executed by the voice side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the first frame button handling process. This process is basically the same process as the first frame button corresponding process described with reference to FIG. 46, and the specific unit movable lottery process is selected with respect to the first frame button corresponding process described with reference to FIG. The process which added the process (S2513) which determines whether the 1st effect unit movable period timer counter, the 2nd effect unit movable period timer counter, and the 3rd effect unit movable period timer counter are 0 when it determines with having carried out It is.

  Specifically, if it is determined in step 2506 that the specific unit movable lottery process has not been won (S2506: NO), after performing the effect unit movable process of step 2510 described in the first embodiment, The first frame button handling process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step 2506 that the specific unit movable lottery process is won (S2506: YES), or when it is determined in step 1619 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 59) that the specific unit standby flag is stored. (S1619: YES), the values of the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters are acquired (S2512), and it is determined whether or not all the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters are zero. (S2513). That is, it is determined whether or not the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are movable.

  If it is determined that the first to third rendering unit movable period timer counters are not 0 (S2513: NO), the specific unit standby flag is stored in the specific unit standby flag storage area 154i provided in the voice RAM 154 (S2514). ), The first frame button handling process is terminated. Thereby, an affirmative determination is made in step 1619 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 59). That is, if it is determined that the specific unit movable lottery process has been won (S2506: YES), if any of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 is moving, it is specified. By storing the unit standby flag (S2514), the processing after step 2512 in the first frame button corresponding processing (FIG. 60) is executed regardless of whether or not the first frame button 26 is operated. In other words, after the specific unit standby flag is stored, even if the first frame button 26 is operated by the player, the effect unit moving process of step 2510 is not executed. In step 2514, if the specific unit standby flag is already stored, the specific unit standby flag is maintained as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters are 0 (S2513: YES), that is, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are all non-movable. If it is determined that it is in the middle, the same step 2 as above
After executing the processing of step 507, step 2508, and step 2509, the specific unit standby flag is deleted from the specific unit standby flag storage area 154i (S2515), and the first frame button corresponding processing is ended as it is. In step 2515, when the specific unit standby flag is not stored, that is, in the same process determined to have won the specific unit movable lottery process, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect. If it is determined that the unit 330 is not movable (S2513: YES), the first frame button handling process is terminated as it is.

  Next, when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the effect unit operation effective period, the first effect unit 310 (first movable portion 311), the second effect unit 320 (second movable portion 321), the second The movable modes of the 3 effect unit 330 (third movable part 331) and the specific unit 340 (specific movable part 341) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a timing chart showing the effect unit operation effective period, the state of the first frame button 26, the state of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340.

  As described above, when the operation valid period is started, a button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a (see FIG. 51). When the player operates the first frame button 26, if the specific unit movable lottery process is not won (FIG. 60, S2506: NO), the effect unit movable process is executed (FIG. 60, S2510). . When the player operates the first frame button 26 at time T43a and determines that the voice-side MPU 152 has won the specific unit movable lottery process (FIG. 60, S2506: YES), the voice-side MPU 152 It is determined whether or not the effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are movable (FIG. 60, S2513). In the example of FIG. 61, since the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are moving at time T43a (FIG. 60, S2513: NO), the specific unit moving process is not performed. The specific unit standby flag is stored (FIG. 60, S2514). When all of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 become non-movable at time T43b (FIG. 60, S2513: YES), the specific unit movable process is executed and the specific unit is processed. 340 moves (FIG. 60, S2507).

  According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  First, in this embodiment, when the specific unit movable lottery process is won (FIG. 60, S2506: YES), the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are not movable. When the determination is made (FIG. 60, S2513: YES), the specific unit moving process is executed (FIG. 60, S2507). For this reason, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340 do not move at the same time, and the player can clearly distinguish the unit that the player should pay attention to. It can suppress confusion.

Further, when the specific unit movable lottery process is won (FIG. 60, S2506: YES), when the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are moving, the specific unit standby flag. (FIG. 60, S2514) and even if the player operates the first frame button 26, all of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 become non-movable. stand by. That is, for example, when the first effect unit 310 is not movable and the second effect unit 320 and the third effect unit 330 are in a movable state, when the first frame button 26 is operated, the specific unit is movable. When the lottery process is not won, the first effect unit 310 is moved, but when the specific unit moveable lottery process is won, the difference in the effect that the first effect unit 310 is not moved (regular deviation) ) Can be created. For this reason, in the process of operating the first frame button 26 (continuous hitting), it is possible to give the player the gameability of searching for an effect (state) that the effect unit that should be movable does not move. It can suppress getting tired early.

(Modification of the fifth embodiment)
A modification of the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, in the first frame button corresponding process (FIG. 60), in step 2513, it is not determined whether or not all the first to third rendering unit movable period timer counters are 0, but is specified. It may be determined whether or not the two production unit movable period timer counters are zero. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to give the player the gameability of searching for an effect (state) in which the effect unit that should be movable does not move in the process of operating the first frame button 26 (continuous hitting). A person can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.

  In the fifth embodiment, the size of the specific unit 340 (specific movable portion 341) may be changed. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a state when the first movable unit 311, the second movable unit 321, and the third movable unit 331 move to the second position and the specific movable unit 341 moves to the fourth position. .

  As shown in FIG. 62, for example, when the first movable part 311, the second movable part 321 and the third movable part 331 are movable to the second position, and the specific movable part 341 is simultaneously movable to the fourth position. The diameter or the like of the specific movable unit 341 may be appropriately changed so that the second movable unit 321 and the third movable unit 331 and the specific movable unit 341 come into contact (collision). In other words, by executing the timer interrupting process (FIG. 59) and the first frame button corresponding process (FIG. 60) as in the fifth embodiment, the first to third movable parts 311 to 331 and the specific movable Since the part 341 does not move at the same time, a configuration as shown in FIG. 62 can also be adopted. That is, the degree of freedom in designing the specific movable unit 341 (specific unit 340) can be improved, and the specific movable unit 341 can have a novel shape for the player, or the size of the specific movable unit 341 can be increased. Therefore, the player can be impressed with the force (exhilaration) of the specific unit 340, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In FIG. 62, the first movable portion 311 is movable to the second position, and even if the specific movable portion 341 is moved to the fourth position, they are not in contact with each other. However, the first movable portion 311 is not in contact with the second movable portion 311. It is good also as a structure which contacts mutually, when the specific movable part 341 moves to a 4th position while moving to a position. In addition, when the first movable portion 311, the second movable portion 321, and the third movable portion 331 move to the second position and the specific movable portion 341 moves simultaneously to the fourth position, the first movable portion 311, the second movable portion One or a combination of the part 321 and the third movable part 331 may be in contact with the specific movable part 341. Furthermore, the shape and size of the first movable part 311, the second movable part 321, and the third movable part 331 can be appropriately changed together with the specific movable part 341, and the first movable part 311, the second movable part 321, The three movable parts 331 can be shaped novel for the player.

(Sixth embodiment)
A sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the specific unit movable process is executed at a predetermined timing with respect to the first embodiment, and the effect unit movable process immediately before the timing is changed. Since other aspects are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted here.

First, the configuration of the voice-side ROM 153 and the voice-side RAM 154 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93.

  As shown in FIG. 63, the voice ROM 153 is provided with a specific unit movable timing lottery table storage area 153f in addition to the various areas 153a to 153e. The specific unit movable timing lottery table storage area 153f is an area in which a lottery table that is referred to in the specific unit preprocessing (FIG. 65) described later is stored.

  The sound side RAM 154 is provided with a specific unit movable flag storage area 154j, a specific unit movable timing timer counter area 154k, and a normal processing period timer counter area 154m in addition to the various areas 154a to 154g. The specific unit movable flag storage area 154j is an area in which a specific unit movable flag is stored in a specific unit preliminary process (FIG. 65) described later. The specific unit movable timing timer counter area 154k is a specific unit movable timing in which a period from the start of the rendering unit operation effective period until the specific unit 340 is moved is set in the specific unit preprocessing (FIG. 65) described later. This is the area where the timer counter is stored. The normal processing period timer counter area 154m is an area in which a normal processing period timer counter in which the normal processing period is set in the specific unit preprocessing (FIG. 65) described later is stored.

  Here, the normal processing period of the present embodiment will be described. The normal processing period in the present embodiment is a period within the effect unit operation effective period set when the period until the specific unit movable process is set, and the period until the specific unit movable process (effect unit operation effective) The period obtained by subtracting the movable period in which one movable period of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 is the longest from the period from the start of the period to the specific timing). is there. That is, in this embodiment, since the movable period of the third effect unit 330 is the longest, the value is obtained by subtracting the movable period of the third effect unit 330 from the period until the specific unit moving process (see FIG. 68). . In the following description, a period obtained by subtracting the normal process period from the period until the specific unit movable process when the period until the specific unit movable process is set will be described as a special process period (see FIG. 68). In addition, since the special process period is a period obtained by subtracting the normal process period from the period until the specific unit movable process, in the present embodiment, the special process period is the same period as one movable period of the third effect unit 330.

  Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This process is basically the same process as the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 36, and is a process in which a specific unit pre-process (S1620) is added to the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. .

  Specifically, in the timer interrupt process, the specific unit preliminary process is executed after the effect unit operation valid period standby flag is deleted in step 1613 (S1620). That is, the specific unit pre-processing is executed when the button operation instruction on the display screen 80a is displayed. Here, the specific unit pre-processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing specific unit pre-processing.

In the specific unit pre-processing, first, it is determined from the information stored in the retained data area 154e in step 1706 in the main-side command response processing (FIG. 37) whether or not the game result of the current game round is a winning result (S2801). ). And when it determines with it being a winning result (S2801: YES), a specific unit movable lottery process is performed (S2802). In this specific unit movable lottery process, basically the same process as the specific unit first lottery process and the like (FIG. 47, S2604 to S2606) described in the first embodiment is executed. Briefly, first, the value of the specific unit movable lottery counter stored in the various counter areas 154g of the voice side RAM 154 is acquired. Then, with reference to the specific unit movable lottery table stored in the various data table storage area 153a of the voice ROM 153, it is determined whether or not the acquired value of the specific unit movable lottery counter is won. In the present embodiment, the specific unit movable lottery table is set so that the winning combination is 4/5.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the specific unit movable lottery process has been won (S2803). If it is determined that the specific unit movable lottery process has been won (S2803: YES), the specific unit movable flag storage area 154j provided in the voice RAM 154 is specified. The unit movable flag is stored (S2804).

  Next, specific unit movable timing lottery processing is performed (S2805). That is, a lottery process for determining when to move the specific unit 340 is performed. Specifically, the value of the specific unit movable timing lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 154g provided in the voice side RAM 154. Here, the specific unit movable timing lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”. For example, 1 is added at a predetermined cycle such as a 2 msec cycle, and the maximum value is set. After reaching, it is initialized to 0. Then, the specific unit movable timing lottery table stored in the specific unit movable timing lottery table storage area 153f provided in the voice ROM 153 is referred to and specified based on the read value of the specific unit movable timing lottery counter. Determine unit movable timing.

  In this embodiment, when the half of the operation effective period has elapsed since the start of the effect unit operation effective period, the winner was won by 1/4, and the period of 2/3 of the operation effective period has elapsed. The specific unit movable timing lottery table is set so that the player wins at a time ¼ and the player wins at a time ½ of the operation valid period.

  Next, the specific unit movable timing timer counter stored in the specific unit movable timing timer counter area 154k of the voice side RAM 154 is set to the period (specific unit) from the start of the production unit operation effective period to the time of lottery in step 2805. The period until the movable process is set (S2806). Note that the update (subtraction) of the numerical value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter set in step 2806 is executed in the timer update process in step 1616 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 64).

  Subsequently, a normal processing period calculation process is executed (S2807). As described above, the normal processing period is a value obtained by subtracting one movable period of the third effect unit 330 from the period until the specific unit movable process in the present embodiment. Then, the normal processing period calculated in step 2807 is set in the normal processing period timer counter stored in the normal processing period timer counter area 154m of the voice side RAM 154 (S2808). Note that the update (subtraction) of the numerical value of the normal processing period timer counter set in step 2808 is executed in the timer update process in step 1616 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 64).

  If the set process of step 2808 is executed, if it is determined in step 2801 that the current game round is not the winning result (S2801: NO), or if it is determined in step 2803 that the specific unit movable lottery process has not been won (S2803: NO), the specific unit preliminary process is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 64), after executing the specific unit pre-process, it is determined whether or not the specific unit movable flag is stored after executing the processes of steps 1613 to 1618 described above. If it is determined that the specific unit movable flag is stored (S1621: YES), it is determined whether or not the effect unit operation valid period timer counter is 0 (S1622). If it is determined that the production unit operation valid period timer counter is 0 (S1622: YES), the specific unit movable flag is deleted (S1623), and this timer interrupt process is terminated. The case where the specific unit movable flag is erased in step 1623 means that the specific unit movable lottery process has been won (FIG. 65, S2803: YES), but during the effect unit operation effective period in which the normal processing period has elapsed. This is a case where the first frame button 26 is not operated by the player.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step 1621 that the specific unit movable flag is not stored (S1621: NO), or if it is determined that the rendering unit operation effective period timer counter is not 0 (S1622: NO), this timer is used as it is. End interrupt processing.

  Next, the first frame button handling process executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the first frame button handling process. This process is basically the same process as the first frame button corresponding process described with reference to FIG. 46, and is a normal processing period with respect to the first frame button corresponding process described with reference to FIG. It is the process which changed the way of movement of a production | presentation unit by determining (S2510, S2517, S2519).

  Specifically, when it is determined in step 2504 that the production unit operation valid period timer counter is not 0 (S2504: NO), that is, when a button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a, the specific unit movable flag storage area 154j. It is determined whether or not the specific unit movable flag is stored in (S2516). If it is determined that the specific unit movable flag is stored (S2516: YES), it is determined whether or not the normal processing period timer counter is 0 (S2517). When it is determined that the normal processing period timer counter is 0 (S2517: YES), it is determined whether or not the specific unit movable timing timer counter is 0 (S2518), and the specific unit movable timing timer counter is not 0. Is determined (S2518: NO), the effect unit special movable process is executed (S2519).

  It should be noted that the effect unit operation valid period timer counter is not 0 (S2504: NO), the specific unit movable flag is stored (S2516: YES), and the normal processing period timer counter is 0 (S2517: YES) Is a state in which the production unit operation is valid (the button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a), the current game round is the winning result, and the normal processing period has elapsed. . The state determined in step 2518 that the specific unit movable timing timer counter is not 0 is a state of the special processing period in the effect unit operation effective period, and in step 2518 it is determined that the specific unit movable timing timer counter is 0. The state that has been achieved is after a period until the specific unit movable timing has elapsed (see FIG. 68).

  Here, the effect unit special movable process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the effect unit special movable process. This process is basically the same process as the effect unit moving process described with reference to FIG. 48, and is earlier (simultaneously) than the specific unit moving timing with respect to the effect unit moving process described with reference to FIG. This is a process of executing the effect unit moving process so that the movement of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 is finished.

Specifically, in the effect unit special movable process, first, the value of the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters is acquired (S2901). Next, it is determined whether or not the first effect unit 310 is moving by determining whether or not the first effect unit moving period timer counter is 0 (S2902). If it is determined that the first effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2902: YES), the movable period of the first effect unit 310 is acquired from the various effect unit movable period storage areas 153d of the voice ROM 153, It is determined whether or not the movable period of one effect unit 310 is equal to or less than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter acquired in step 2518 in the first frame button handling process (FIG. 66) (S2903). That is, when the movement process of the first effect unit 310 is executed, it is determined whether or not the movement of the first effect unit 310 ends before (simultaneously) the specific unit movement timing.

  If it is determined that the movable period of the first effect unit 310 is equal to or less than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2903: YES), the processing of Step 2703 and Step 2704 in the effect unit moving process described with reference to FIG. Similarly to the above, the first effect unit movable process is executed (S2904), and the movable period setting process of the first effect unit 310 to the first effect unit movable period timer counter is executed (S2905).

  If the setting process of the movable period of the first effect unit 310 in step 2905 is executed, or if it is determined in step 2902 that the first effect unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2902: NO), the second effect unit. By determining whether or not the movable period timer counter is 0, it is determined whether or not the second rendering unit 320 is movable (S2906). And when it determines with the 2nd effect unit movable period timer counter being 0 (S2906: YES), the movable period of the 2nd effect unit 320 is acquired from the various effect unit movable period storage area 153d of the audio | voice side ROM153, and the 1st It is determined whether or not the movable period of the second effect unit 320 is equal to or less than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter acquired in step 2518 in the first frame button corresponding process (FIG. 66) (S2907). That is, when the movement process of the second effect unit 320 is executed, it is determined whether or not the movement of the second effect unit 320 ends before (simultaneously) the specific unit movement timing.

  And when it determines with the movable period of the 2nd production unit 320 being below the value of a specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2907: YES), the process of step 2706 and step 2707 in the production unit movable process demonstrated in the said FIG. Similarly to the above, the second effect unit movable process is executed (S2908) and the second effect unit movable period timer counter is set to the second effect unit movable period timer counter (S2909).

  If the setting process of the movable period of the second effect unit 320 in step 2909 is executed, or if it is determined in step 2906 that the second effect unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2906: NO), the third effect unit By determining whether or not the movable period timer counter is 0, it is determined whether or not the third effect unit 330 is movable (S2910). And when it determines with the 3rd effect unit movable period timer counter being 0 (S2910: YES), the movable period of the 3rd effect unit 330 is acquired from the various effect unit movable period storage area 153d of the audio | voice side ROM153, It is determined whether or not the movable period of the third effect unit 330 is equal to or less than the specific unit movable timing timer counter acquired in step 2518 in the first frame button handling process (FIG. 66) (S2911). That is, when the movement process of the third effect unit 330 is executed, it is determined whether or not the movement of the third effect unit 330 ends before (simultaneously) the specific unit move timing.

And when it determines with the movable period of the 3rd production unit 330 being below a specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2911: YES), it is the same as the process of step 2709 and step 2710 in the production unit movable process demonstrated in the said FIG. In addition, the third effect unit moving process is executed (S2912), and after the third effect unit moving period timer counter is set to the third effect unit moving period timer counter (S2913), the effect unit special is directly processed. The movable process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step 2903 that the movable period of the first presentation unit 310 is greater than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2903: NO), the movable period of the second presentation unit 320 is the specific unit movable timing in step 22907. If it is determined that the timer counter value is greater than the value of the timer counter (S2907: NO), if it is determined in step 2910 that the third rendering unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2910: NO), or if the third rendering unit 330 is determined in step 2911. When it is determined that the movable period is longer than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2911: NO), the effect unit special movable process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step 2903 that the movable period of the first effect unit 310 is greater than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2903: NO), the processing relating to the second effect unit 320 and the third effect unit 330 is not performed. In this embodiment, since the movable period is lengthened in the order of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330, the movable period of the first effect unit 310 is the specific unit movable timing timer. This is because the movable period of the second effect unit and the third effect unit 330 is always greater than the value of the movable timing timer counter of the specific unit 340 when it is greater than the counter value. Similarly, when it is determined in step 2907 that the movable period of the second effect unit 320 is greater than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2907: NO), the second effect unit 330 is not processed. This is because when the movable period of the effect unit 320 is greater than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter, the movable period of the third effect unit 330 is necessarily longer than the value of the movable timing timer counter of the specific unit 340.

  Returning to the description of the first frame button corresponding processing (FIG. 66), when it is determined that the specific unit movable flag is not stored (S2516: NO), and when it is determined that the normal processing period timer counter is not 0 ( (S2517: NO) After performing the effect unit normal movable process (S2510), the first frame button corresponding process is terminated as it is. Note that in the effect unit normal moving process in step 2510, the same process as the effect unit moving process described with reference to FIG. 48 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step 2518 that the specific unit movable timing timer counter is 0 (S2518: YES), the specific unit movable process in step 2507 and the specific unit movable effect command transmission in step 2508 described above with reference to FIG. The process and the rendering unit operation valid period timer counter 0 clear process in step 2509 are executed. Then, after erasing the specific unit movable flag from the specific unit movable flag storage area 154j (S2520), the first frame button handling process is terminated. When the first frame button 26 is not operated by the player after the specific unit movable timing timer counter reaches 0, as described above, the specific unit movable flag is displayed at step 1623 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 64). Is erased.

Next, when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the effect unit operation effective period, the first effect unit 310 (first movable portion 311), the second effect unit 320 (second movable portion 321), the second The movable modes of the 3 effect unit 330 (third movable part 331) and the specific unit 340 (specific movable part 341) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing the effect unit operation effective period, the state of the first frame button 26, the state of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340. In FIG. 68, an example in which the game times is the winning result and the button operation instruction (see FIG. 51) is displayed on the display screen 80a and the specific unit movable lottery process is won will be described.

  First, in FIG. 68, the final time point of the effect unit operation valid period set in step 1612 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 64) is set as a time point T44e, and set in step 2806 of the specific unit pre-process (FIG. 65). The final time point (specific unit movable timing) of the period until the specific unit movable processing is set as T44c. In this case, the normal processing period is a period up to time T44a obtained by subtracting the movable period of the third effect unit 330 from the period up to time T44c. The special processing period is a period from time T44a to time T44c, which is a period obtained by subtracting the normal processing period from the period until the specific unit movable process.

  Before the time T44a, when the player operates the first frame button 26, because it is within the normal processing period (FIG. 66, S2517: NO), regardless of whether the specific unit movable flag is stored or not. The movable aspects of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are the same as those in FIG. That is, when the player operates the first frame button 26, the movable process of the rendering unit that is not movable is executed.

  On the other hand, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at time T44b within the special processing period after time T44a, in the example of FIG. 67, the movable period of the first effect unit 310 is until the specific knit movable process. Although shorter than the period (FIG. 67, S2903: YES), the movable period of the second effect unit 320 and the movable period of the third effect unit 330 are longer than the period until the specific unit movable process (FIG. 67, S2907: NO). For this reason, the audio side MPU 152 executes only the first effect unit moving process. That is, when the player operates the first frame button 26 within the special processing period, only the effect unit whose movement ends within the special processing period is moved.

  When the player operates the first frame button 26 at time T44d after the period until the specific unit movable process at time T44c has elapsed, the period until the specific unit movable process has elapsed (FIG. 66, S2518). : YES), the audio side MPU 152 moves the specific unit 340 by executing the specific unit moving process.

  According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  First, the specific effector movable timing (time point) is determined, and the first effector unit 310, the second effector unit 320, and the third effector unit 330 are in a non-movable state at the specified unit effector timing. 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are controlled. For this reason, when the specific unit 340 (specific movable part 341) moves, the attention degree of the player with respect to the specific unit 340 can be improved. That is, the unit that the player should pay attention to can be clarified.

In addition, since the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are in a non-movable state at the specific unit movable timing, the first effect described in the modification of the fifth embodiment is performed. The effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 can be moved to the second position, and can be configured to contact when the specific unit 340 is simultaneously moved to the fourth position (see FIG. 62). ), The degree of freedom in designing the shapes of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340 can be improved. In addition, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the shapes of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340 by applying the modification of the fifth embodiment. The same applies to the following seventh to tenth embodiments.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are non-movable when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the special processing period. Even if the effect unit exists, if the operation is not completed within the special end period, the movable process for the effect unit is not executed. In other words, during the special processing period, it is possible to create a difference in production (so-called law failure) that the movement of the production unit is not started despite the player operating the first frame button 26. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a novel effect that the various effect units 310 to 330 that should be movable may not move in the process of operating the first frame button 26 (continuous hitting). In addition, the player who noticed the effect that the various effect units 310 to 330 that should have moved cannot be moved, only understood that the specific unit 340 is moved when the first frame button 26 is operated thereafter. Since the 1st frame button 26 can be operated in a state, the attention degree with respect to the various effect units 310-330 of a player can further be improved.

(Modification of the sixth embodiment)
A modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, when the player operates the first frame button 26, if the voice side MPU 152 determines that it is the specific unit movable timing (FIG. 66, S2518: YES), the specific unit movable process is executed. However, the specific unit moving process may be performed when the player determines that it is the specific unit moving timing without operating the first frame button 26. When executing the specific unit movable process in this way, as shown in FIG. 69, the specific unit movable timing timer counter determination process in step 2518, in contrast to the first frame button corresponding process described in FIG. The specific unit movable process in step 2507, the specific unit movable effect command transmission process in step 2508, the effect unit operation effective period timer counter 0 clear process in step 2509, and the specific unit movable flag clear process in step 2520 are not executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 70, after executing the specific unit preliminary process in step 1620 for the timer interrupt process described in FIG. 64, the specific unit movable flag determination process in step 2516 described in FIG. S1621), specific unit movable timing timer counter determination process in step 2518 (S1624), specific unit movable process in step 2507 (S1625), specific unit movable effect command transmission process in step 2508 (S1626), effect unit operation valid in step 2509 The period timer counter 0 clear process (S1627) and the specific unit movable flag erasure process (S1628) in step 2520 may be appropriately executed.

  In such a configuration, the specific unit 340 moves at the specific unit moving timing. For this reason, the probability that the specific unit 340 moves immediately near the end of the movement of the effect unit increases, and it is possible to provide an effect that is more powerful (exhilarating) for the player.

  In the sixth embodiment, the normal processing period can be changed as appropriate. For example, the normal processing period may be a period twice as long as the movable period of the third effect unit 330, may be a period of three times, or may be a movable period of the second effect unit 320. Good.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, the tables referred to in the specific unit movable lottery process in step 2802 and the specific unit movable timing lottery process in step 2805 can be changed as appropriate. For example, in step 2805, the time point when the production unit operation valid period ends may be determined as the specific unit movable timing.

(Seventh embodiment)
A seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the specific unit moving process is executed when the player operates the first frame button 26 with respect to the sixth embodiment. The other aspects are the same as in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  In the sixth embodiment, when the player operates the first frame button 26, if the sound side MPU 152 determines that the specific unit movable timing timer counter is 0 (FIG. 66, S2518: YES), the specific unit movable Processing (FIG. 66, S2507) is executed. That is, in the sixth embodiment, when the specific unit movable flag is stored and the period until the specific unit movable process is set in the specific unit movable timing timer counter, a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the effect unit operation effective period. Then (when the specific unit movable timing timer counter becomes 0), the specific unit 340 moves when the player operates the first frame button 26 regardless of the previous operation state of the first frame button 26. That is, even if the player operates the first frame button 26 only once in a situation where it is assumed that a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the effect unit operation effective period, the specific unit 340 moves. For this reason, the player operates the first frame button 26 to move the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330, and allows the player to move the first effect unit 310 and the second effect unit 320. In addition, there is a possibility that the purpose of improving the expectation until the specific unit 340 moves while facilitating the movement of the third effect unit 330 may be diminished.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, the specific unit movable lottery process is executed by operating the first frame button 26. That is, when the game time is a winning result, the probability that the specific unit 340 moves is increased as the player operates the first frame button 26.

  First, the specific unit pre-processing in step 1620 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 64) executed by the voice-side MPU 152 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing specific unit pre-processing. This process is basically the same process as the specific unit pre-process described with reference to FIG. 65, but the specific unit movable lottery process (S2802) is executed for the specific unit pre-process described with reference to FIG. This is a process that does not.

  Specifically, in the specific unit pre-processing, if it is determined in step 2801 that the game result of the current game round is a winning result (S2801: YES), the specific unit movable lottery processing is not performed and the specification of step 2805 is performed. A unit movable timing lottery process is executed. That is, in the specific unit pre-processing of this embodiment, when it is determined that the game result of the current game round is a winning result, the specific unit movable timing lottery process is always executed to determine the specific unit movable timing. In the unit pre-processing, the lottery process for determining whether or not the specific unit 340 is actually movable is not executed, and the specific unit movable flag is not stored.

  Next, the first frame button corresponding process (S1618) executed by the audio side MPU 152 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the first frame button handling process. This process is basically the same process as the first frame button corresponding process described with reference to FIG. 66, and in contrast to the first frame button corresponding process described with reference to FIG. 66, the specific unit movable lottery process (S2505). ) Is added.

Specifically, when it is determined in step 2504 that the effect unit operation valid period timer counter is not 0 (S2504: NO), it is determined whether or not the specific unit movable flag is stored in the specific unit movable flag storage area 154j. (S2516). In the present embodiment, the specific unit movable flag is stored by a specific unit flag storage process (S2521) described later during the first frame button corresponding process.

  When it is determined that the specific unit movable flag is not stored (S2516: NO), the specific unit movable lottery process (S2505) is executed. That is, in this embodiment, the lottery for determining whether or not to move the specific unit 340 is executed in response to the player operating the first frame button 26. Here, the specific unit movable lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the specific unit movable lottery process.

  In the specific unit moving process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal process period timer counter set in step 2808 in the specific unit preliminary process (FIG. 71) is 0 (S2607). And when it determines with a normal process period timer counter being 0 (S2607: YES), this specific unit movable lottery process is complete | finished as it is. In the present embodiment, the case where the normal processing period timer counter is 0 means that the normal processing period is not set by determining that the current game round is not a winning result in the specific unit preliminary processing (FIG. 71). In this case (S2801: NO), or it is determined that the current game time is a winning result and the normal processing period is set, but the normal processing period has elapsed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal processing period timer counter is not 0 (S2607: NO), that is, when the current game time is a winning result and the normal processing period has not elapsed, the normal processing acquired in step 2607 is obtained. It is determined whether or not the value of the period timer counter is equal to or greater than ½ of the value of the normal process period set in the specific unit preliminary process (FIG. 71) (S2608). When it is determined that the acquired value is smaller than half of the set normal processing period value (S2608: NO), it is determined whether or not the acquired value is equal to or more than 1/4 of the set normal processing period value. (S2609). And when it determines with the acquired value being 1/2 or more of the value of the set normal process period (S2608: YES), a specific unit 1st movable lottery process is performed (S2604), and the acquired value is. When it is determined that the value is smaller than ½ of the set value of the normal processing period and ¼ or more (S2609: YES), the specific unit second movable lottery process is executed (S2605), and the acquired value Is determined to be smaller than ¼ of the set value of the normal processing period (S2609: NO), the specific unit third movable lottery process is executed (S2606), and the specific unit movable lottery process ends.

  Returning to the description of the first frame button corresponding process (FIG. 72), after executing the specific unit movable lottery process in step 2505, it is determined whether or not the specific unit movable lottery process is won (S2506), and the specific unit movable lottery is determined. When it is determined that the process is won (S2506: YES), the specific unit movable flag is stored in the specific unit movable flag storage area 154j. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step 2516, and once the specific unit movable flag is stored, the specific unit movable lottery process in step 2505 is not executed.

  When the specific unit movable flag is stored in step 2521 or when it is determined that the specific unit movable lottery process has not been won (S2506: NO), after performing the effect unit normal movable process (S2510), the first The frame button handling process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the specific unit movable flag is stored (S2516: YES), it is determined whether or not the normal processing period timer counter is 0 (S2517). If it is determined that the normal process period timer counter is not 0 (S2517: NO), the effect unit normal movable process is executed (S2510), and if it is determined that the normal process period timer counter is 0 ( 66, based on the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2518), the production unit special movable process (S2519), or the specific unit movable process (S2507) and the subsequent processes (S2517: YES). S2508, S2509, and S2520) are executed, and the first frame button handling process is terminated.

  Note that the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 152 of the present embodiment is the same as that in FIG. 64 described above, and the specific unit movable lottery process has been won (FIG. 72, S2506: YES), but the normal processing period has passed. If the first frame button 26 is not operated by the player during the unit operation valid period, the specific unit movable flag is cleared in step 1623.

  According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the specific unit movable lottery process (S2505) is executed in the first frame button handling process (FIG. 72). That is, the specific unit movable lottery process is executed when the player operates the first frame button 26. For this reason, when the game time is a winning result, the specific unit movable lottery process is executed as the player operates the first frame button 26, and the probability that the specific unit 340 is movable increases. Therefore, the player can be made to actively operate the first frame button 26, and the player can enjoy the movement of the various rendering units 310 to 330 while giving the player a sense of expectation until the specific unit 340 moves. be able to.

  In addition, since the specific unit movable lottery process is executed when the player operates the first frame button 26, the first frame button 26 is operated while expecting the player to move the specific unit 340. It is possible to select whether to fully enjoy the production without operating the first frame button 26. Therefore, diversification of games can be achieved, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game early.

(Modification of the seventh embodiment)
A modification of the seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, as in the modification of the sixth embodiment, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 70), it is determined whether the specific unit movable flag is stored (S1621), and the specific unit movable flag is determined. Is stored (S1621), the subsequent steps 1624-1628 may be executed. Even in such a configuration, the specific unit movable flag is stored in the first frame button handling process (FIG. 72), so that the player can be made to actively operate the first frame button 26.

  In the seventh embodiment, the comparison value of step 2608 and step 2609 in the specific unit movable lottery process (FIG. 73) can be changed as appropriate. For example, in step 2608, the value of the normal processing period timer counter is changed to the normal processing period. You may make it determine whether it is below 1/3 of the value set to the timer counter.

(Eighth embodiment)
An eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In this embodiment, when the first frame button 26 is operated within the special processing period, the movable period of the effect unit is changed so that the movement ends within the special processing period as compared to the sixth embodiment. is there. The other aspects are the same as in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

First, the effect unit special movable process executed by the audio side MPU 152 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. 74 and 75 are flowcharts showing the effect unit special movable process. This process is basically the same process as the production unit special movable process described in FIG. 67, and it is determined that the production unit movable period (basic movable period) is larger than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter. In this case, the production unit shortening movable process (S2914, S2915, S2916) is executed. The effect unit special movable process is a process executed in step 2519 of the first frame button corresponding process (FIG. 66).

  Specifically, when it is determined in step 2903 that the movable period of the first presentation unit 310 is equal to or less than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2903: YES), the first presentation unit normal movement process is executed (S2904). When it is determined that the movable period of the first presentation unit 310 is greater than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2903: NO), the first presentation unit shortening movable process is executed (S2914). The first effect unit normal movable process is the same process as the first effect unit movable process. On the other hand, the first effect unit shortened movable process is a movable process in which one movable period of the first effect unit 310 is shorter than the first effect unit normal movable process, and in the first frame button corresponding process (FIG. 66). This is a movable process in which the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter acquired in step 2518 is one movable period (shortened movable period). That is, in the first effect unit shortening movable process in step 2914, the first effect unit 310 is moved so that the end point of the movement coincides with the time point of the specific unit move process. In the present embodiment, in the first effect unit shortening movable process, one movable period is shortened by making the movable speed of the first movable portion 311 faster than the first effect unit normal movable process.

  Similarly, when it is determined in step 2907 that the movable period of the second effect unit 320 is equal to or less than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2907: YES), the second effect unit normal movable process is executed (S2908). When it is determined that the movable period of the second presentation unit 320 is greater than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2907: NO), the second presentation unit shortening movable process is executed (S2915). If it is determined in step 2911 that the movable period of the third effect unit 330 is equal to or less than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2911: YES), the third effect unit normal moving process is executed (S2912). If it is determined that the movable period of the third effect unit 330 is greater than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2911: NO), the third effect unit shortened movable process is executed (S2916).

  Note that the second effect unit normal movable process in step 2908 and the third effect unit normal movable process in step 2912 are the same processes as the second effect unit movable process and the third effect unit movable process. In addition, the second production unit shortening movable process in step 2915 and the third presentation unit shortening movable process in step 2916 have a single movable period shortened by the same method as the first presentation unit shortened movable process in step 2914. .

  However, the method of shortening one movable period in the first to third effect unit shortening movable processes (S2914, S2915, S2916) is not limited to the above, and for example, the movable distance of the first movable part 311 It is also possible to shorten the one movable period by shortening (see the eleventh embodiment described later). That is, the first movable unit 311 may shorten the one movable period by returning to the first position without reaching the second position from the first position. Moreover, the method of shortening one movable period in the 1st-3rd production unit shortening movable process may be a combination of shortening the movable distance and increasing the movable speed.

Next, when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the effect unit operation effective period, the first effect unit 310 (first movable portion 311), the second effect unit 320 (second movable portion 321), the second The movable modes of the 3 effect unit 330 (third movable part 331) and the specific unit 340 (specific movable part 341) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a timing chart showing the effect unit operation effective period, the state of the first frame button 26, the state of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340. In FIG. 76, an example will be described in which the game times is a winning result, and a button operation instruction (see FIG. 51) is displayed on the display screen 80a, and the specific unit movable lottery process is won.

  First, in FIG. 76, as in the case of FIG. 68 of the sixth embodiment, the final point of the effect unit operation valid period set in step 1612 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 64) is the time T45e. The final time point (specific unit movable timing) of the period up to the specific unit movable process set in step 2806 of the unit preliminary process (FIG. 65) is T45c. Therefore, the period from time T45c to time T45a obtained by subtracting the movable period of the third effect unit 330 is the normal processing period, and the period from time T45a to time T45c is the special processing period.

  When the player operates the first frame button 26 at time T45b within the special processing period after time T45a, the movable period of the first effect unit 310 is longer than the period until the specific unit movable process in the example of FIG. Although short (FIG. 74, S2903: YES), the movable period of the second effect unit 320 and the movable period of the third effect unit 330 are longer than the period until the specific unit movable process (FIG. 74, S2907: NO, FIG. 75, S2911). : NO). For this reason, the audio side MPU 152 executes a first effect unit normal movable process (S2904), a second effect unit shortened movable process (S2915), and a third effect unit shortened movable process (S2916). That is, the second effect unit 320 and the third effect unit 330 are subjected to the shortened movement process so that the movement ends when the specific unit movement timing timer counter reaches 0 (time T45c).

  Thereafter, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at time T45d after the period until the specific unit movable process at time T45c has elapsed, the period until the specific unit movable process has elapsed (FIG. 66, S2516). : YES), the audio side MPU 152 moves the specific unit 340 by executing the specific unit moving process.

  According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the special processing period, if there is an effect unit that is not movable, the movable period is shorter than the period until the specific unit movable process. Performs the production unit normal movable process (S2904, S2908, S2912), and executes the shortened movable process when the movable period is longer than the period until the specific unit movable process (S2914, S2915, S2916). In other words, during the special processing period, the production unit whose movable period is longer than the period until the specific unit movable process is subjected to the movable process in which the movable mode (movable speed, movable distance, etc.) is changed, and the difference in production ( So-called law failure). For this reason, it is possible to give the player a new effect that the movable mode of the various effect units 310 to 330 changes in the process of operating (striking) the first frame button 26. In addition, the player who notices the effect that the movable mode of the various effect units 310 to 330 has changed is in a state where only the player understands that the specific unit 340 moves when the first frame button 26 is operated thereafter. Since the 1st frame button 26 can be operated, the attention degree with respect to the various production units 310-330 of a player can further be improved.

Note that such a change in the movable mode is an effect that is less noticeable to the player than the configuration of the sixth embodiment in which the effect unit does not move even though the first frame button 26 is operated. The degree of attention to the various production units 310 to 330 can be further improved.

(Modification of the eighth embodiment)
A modification of the eighth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, similar to the modification of the sixth embodiment, the specific unit is movable when it is determined that it is time to move the specific unit 340 without operating the first frame button 26 by the player. Processing may be performed (see FIGS. 69 and 70).

  In the eighth embodiment, the specific unit movable lottery process (S2505) may be executed in the first frame button handling process (FIG. 72) as in the seventh embodiment.

(Ninth embodiment)
A ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, when the first frame button 26 is operated within the special processing period with respect to the sixth embodiment, the end point of the special processing period, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and The third production unit 330 is made to coincide with the movable end time. The other aspects are the same as in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  First, the configuration of the audio side RAM 154 of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, the sound side RAM 154 is provided with various effect unit standby timer counter areas 154n and various effect unit standby flag storage areas 154p in addition to the various areas 154a to 154g, 154j, 154k, and 154m. Yes. The various effect unit standby timer counter area 154n stores various effect unit standby timer counters in which a standby period until the effect unit is moved is set in the effect unit special movable process (FIGS. 78 and 79) described later. It is an area. The various effect unit standby flag storage area 154p is an area in which an effect unit standby flag corresponding to the effect unit standby timer counter in which the standby period is set is stored in the effect unit special movable process (FIGS. 78 and 79) described later. is there.

  Here, the normal processing period of the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the normal processing period is a period obtained by subtracting the movable period × 1.5 of the third effect unit 330 from the period until the specific unit movable process (see FIG. 82). The special processing period is a period obtained by subtracting the normal processing period from the effect unit operation effective period, and is a period of the movable period of the third effect unit 330 × 1.5. That is, in this embodiment, the special processing period is longer than that in the sixth embodiment.

  Furthermore, the stand-by period of the effect unit in the present embodiment is a state in which the player can move when the first frame button 26 is operated, but waits until the first frame button 26 is operated and then starts moving. It is a period to do.

  Next, the effect unit special movable process executed by the audio side MPU 152 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. 78 and 79 are flowcharts showing the effect unit special movable process. This process is basically the same process as the effect unit special movable process described with reference to FIG. 67, and the player performs the process within the special process period with respect to the effect unit special movable process described with reference to FIG. When the one-frame button 26 is operated, when the movable period of the effect unit is shorter than the period until the specific unit movable process, the movable process of the effect unit is delayed. This effect unit special movable process is the effect unit special movable process of step 2519 in the first frame button corresponding process described with reference to FIG.

  Specifically, it is determined in step 2902 that the first rendering unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2902: YES), and in step 2903 the movable period of the first rendering unit 310 is equal to or less than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter. (S2902: YES), it is determined whether or not the first rendering unit standby timer counter is 0 (S2917). When it is determined that the first effect unit standby timer counter is 0 (S2917: YES), that is, when it is determined that the first effect unit standby period is not set, the first effect unit standby period calculation process is performed. Execute (S2918). In this standby period calculation process, a standby period (a period until the first effect unit 310 starts moving) is calculated so that the movement end point of the first effect unit 310 coincides with the time point until the specific unit move process.

  Next, the standby period calculated in step 2918 is set to the first rendering unit standby timer counter stored in the various rendering unit standby timer counter area 154n of the audio side RAM 154 (S2919). Thus, after the standby period is set in step 2919, a negative determination is made in step 2917. Next, the first effect unit standby flag is stored in the various effect unit standby flag storage area 154p provided in the voice-side RAM 154 (S2920).

  When the flag storing process of step 2920 is executed, when it is determined at step 2902 that the first rendering unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2902: NO), or when the first rendering unit standby timer counter is not 0 at step 2917. If it is determined (S2917: NO), the determination process of step 2906 is performed, and if the determination is affirmative in step 2906, the determination process of step 2907 is performed. If it is determined in step 2907 that the second rendering unit movable period is equal to or shorter than the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2907: YES), it is determined whether or not the second rendering unit standby timer counter is 0 (S2921). ). When it is determined that the second effect unit standby timer counter is 0 (S2921: YES), that is, when it is determined that the second effect unit standby period is not set, as shown in FIG. 79, the second effect unit standby timer counter is set. Unit standby period calculation processing is executed (S2922). In this standby period calculation process, a standby period (a period until the second effect unit 320 starts moving) is calculated so that the movable end time of the second effect unit 320 coincides with the time until the specific unit move process. .

  Next, the standby period calculated in step 2922 is set in the second rendering unit standby timer counter stored in the various rendering unit standby timer counter area 154n of the sound side RAM 154 (S2923). Thus, after the standby period is set in step 2923, a negative determination is made in step 2921. Next, the second effect unit standby flag is stored in the various effect unit standby flag storage area 154p provided in the sound side RAM 154 (S2924).

When the flag storing process of step 2924 is executed, when it is determined in step 2906 that the second effect unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2906: NO), or in step 2921 the second effect unit standby timer counter is not 0. If it is determined (S2921: NO), the determination process of step 2910 is performed, and if the determination is affirmative in step 2910, the determination process of step 2911 is performed. If it is determined in step 2911 that the third rendering unit movable period is equal to or shorter than the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2911: YES), it is determined whether the third rendering unit standby timer counter is 0 (S2925). ). When it is determined that the third effect unit standby timer counter is 0 (S2925: YES), that is, when it is determined that the third effect unit standby period is not set, the third effect unit standby period calculation process is executed. (S2926). In this standby period calculation process, a standby period (a period until the third effect unit 330 starts moving) is calculated so that the movement end point of the third effect unit 330 coincides with the time point until the specific unit move process. .

  Next, the standby period calculated in step 2926 is set in the third rendering unit standby timer counter stored in the various rendering unit standby timer counter area 154n of the audio side RAM 154 (S2927). Thus, after the standby period is set in step 2927, a negative determination is made in step 2925. Next, after storing the third effect unit standby flag in the various effect unit standby flag storage area 154p provided in the sound side RAM 154 (S2928), the effect unit special movable process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, the movable period is lengthened in the order of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330. Therefore, during the special processing period, the first frame button 26 is operated by the player while the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are non-movable, and the first effect unit When a standby period is set for 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330, the standby period is a period until the first effect unit 310 is moved, and the second effect unit 320 is movable. It becomes long in order of the waiting period until it makes it move, and the waiting period until the 3rd production unit 330 is moved.

  Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This process is basically the same process as the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 64, and is a process in which an effect unit standby release process (S1629) is added to the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. is there.

  Specifically, in this timer interrupt process, after the timer update process is executed (S1616), the rendering unit standby release process is executed (S1629). Here, the rendering unit standby release processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the rendering unit standby release process.

  In the effect unit standby release process, first, it is determined whether or not the first effect unit standby flag is stored in the various effect unit standby flag storage areas 154p of the sound side RAM 154 (S3001). If it is determined that the first effect unit standby flag is stored (S3001: YES), the value of the first effect unit standby timer counter is acquired, and whether or not the first effect unit standby timer counter is 0 is determined. Is determined (S3002). If it is determined that the first effect unit standby timer counter is 0 (S3002: YES), the first effect unit moving process is executed (S3003). That is, when the first frame button 26 is operated by the player during the special process period and it is determined that the standby period set for the first effect unit 310 has elapsed, the first effect unit movable process is executed. After executing the first effect unit movable process, the movable period of the first effect unit 310 is set in the first effect unit movable period timer counter (S3004), and the first effect unit standby flag is deleted (S3005). The effect unit standby release process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, the standby period until the first presentation unit 310 is moved as described above is longer than the standby period until the second presentation unit 320 and the third presentation unit 330 are moved. When executing the first effect unit movable process, the second effect unit movable process (S3008) and the third effect unit movable process (S3013) described later have already been executed. For this reason, when the first effect unit moving process is executed, the effect unit standby release process is terminated without executing the processes (S3006 to S3015) related to the second effect unit 320 and the third effect unit 330 described later. .

  When it is determined in step 3001 that the first effect unit standby flag is not stored (S3001: NO), or when it is determined in step 3002 that the first effect unit standby timer counter is not 0 (S3002: NO). Then, it is determined whether or not the second effect unit standby flag is stored in the various effect unit standby flag storage area 154p of the voice side RAM 154 (S3006). And when it determines with the 2nd production unit standby flag being stored (S3006: YES), the value of the 2nd production unit standby timer counter is acquired, and the said 2nd production unit standby timer counter is 0. Is determined (S3007). If it is determined that the second effect unit standby timer counter is 0 (S3007: YES), the second effect unit moving process is executed (S3008). That is, when the first frame button 26 is operated by the player during the special process period and it is determined that the standby period set for the second effect unit 320 has elapsed, the second effect unit movable process is executed. After executing the second effect unit movable process, the movable period of the second effect unit 320 is set in the second effect unit movable period timer counter (S3009), and the second effect unit standby flag is deleted (S3010). The effect unit standby release process is terminated. That is, as described above, the standby period until the second presentation unit 320 is moved is longer than the standby period until the third presentation unit 330 is moved. In the third stage unit moving process, which will be described later, has already been executed. For this reason, when performing the 2nd production unit movable process, the production unit stand-by cancellation process is ended, without performing processing (S3011-S3015) about the 3rd production unit 330 mentioned below.

  When it is determined in step 3006 that the second effect unit standby flag is not stored (S3006: NO), or when it is determined in step 3007 that the second effect unit standby timer counter is not 0 (S3007: NO). Then, it is determined whether or not the third effect unit standby flag is stored in the various effect unit standby flag storage area 154p of the voice side RAM 154 (S3011). If it is determined that the third effect unit standby flag is stored (S3011: YES), the value of the third effect unit standby timer counter is acquired, and whether or not the third effect unit standby timer counter is 0 is determined. Is determined (S3012). If it is determined that the third effect unit standby timer counter is 0 (S3012: YES), the third effect unit moving process is executed (S3013). That is, when the first frame button 26 is operated by the player during the special process period and it is determined that the standby period set for the third effect unit 330 has elapsed, the third effect unit movable process is executed. After executing the third effect unit movable process, the movable period of the third effect unit 330 is set in the third effect unit movable period timer counter (S3014), and the third effect unit standby flag is deleted (S3015). The production unit standby release process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 3011 that the third effect unit standby flag is not stored (S3011: NO), or if it is determined in step 3012 that the third effect unit standby flag is not stored (S3012: NO), the present production unit standby release process is terminated as it is.

  In this way, in the effect unit standby release process, when the standby period for the various effect units 310 to 330 is set, the corresponding effect after the standby period has passed, regardless of whether or not the first frame button 26 is operated. Performs unit movement processing.

Next, when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the effect unit operation effective period, the first effect unit 310 (first movable portion 311), the second effect unit 320 (second movable portion 321), the second The movable modes of the 3 effect unit 330 (third movable part 331) and the specific unit 340 (specific movable part 341) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a timing chart showing the effect unit operation effective period, the state of the first frame button 26, the state of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340. In FIG. 82, an example will be described in which the game times is a winning result, and a button operation instruction (see FIG. 51) is displayed on the display screen 80a, and the specific unit movable lottery process is won.

  First, in FIG. 82, as in FIG. 68 of the sixth embodiment, the final point of the effect unit operation valid period set in step 1612 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 80) is set as a time point T46h. The final time point (specific unit movable timing) of the period up to the specific unit movable process set in step 2806 of the unit preliminary process (FIG. 65) is T46f. Therefore, a period from time T46c to time T46a obtained by subtracting the movable period of the third effect unit 330 × 1.5 is a normal processing period, and a period from time T46a to time T46c is a special processing period.

  Then, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at the time T46b within the special processing period after the time T46a, in the example of FIG. 82, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit. 330 is non-movable (FIG. 78, S2902: YES, 2906: YES, FIG. 79, S2910: YES). At time T46b, the movable period of the first effect unit 310 and the second effect unit 320 are movable. Both the period and the movable period of the third effect unit 330 are longer than the period until the specific unit movable process (FIG. 78, S2903: YES, 2907: YES, FIG. 80, S2911: YES). In addition, the operation of the first frame button 26 at the time T46b is the first operation after the special processing period is started, so that the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are not yet operated. The standby period is not set (FIG. 79, S2917: YES, S2921: YES, FIG. 80, S2925: YES).

  For this reason, the audio side MPU 152 sets a waiting period for each of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 so that the movable end time coincides with the time until the specific unit moving process. (FIG. 78, S2919, FIG. 79, S2923, S2927).

  Then, when the standby period for the third effect unit 330 elapses at the time T46c, the audio side MPU 152 executes the third effect unit moving process (FIG. 81, S3013), and the standby period for the second effect unit 320 elapses at the time T46d. Then, the second effect unit movable process is executed (FIG. 81, S3008), and when the standby period for the first effect unit 310 elapses at time T46e, the first effect unit movable process is executed (FIG. 81, S3003). In the unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330, the time point T46f is the movable end point. Thereafter, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at time T46g after the period until the specific unit movable process at time T46f has elapsed, the period until the specific unit movable process has elapsed (FIG. 66, S2518). : YES), the audio side MPU 152 moves the specific unit 340 by executing the specific unit moving process.

  According to 9th Embodiment described above, there exist the following outstanding effects.

  That is, in the present embodiment, during the special processing period, when the player operates the first frame button 26, if the movable period is shorter than the period until the specific unit movable process, a standby period is set for the corresponding effect unit. (FIG. 78, S2919, FIG. 79, S2923, S2927). In other words, it is possible to produce a difference in production (so-called law deviation) that the movement of the production unit is not started simultaneously with the operation of the first frame button 26. For this reason, in the process of operating the first frame button 26 (continuous hit), the player expects that an effect that the various effect units 310 to 330 that should be movable will not move is generated. And the player's attention to the various effect units 310 to 330 can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the standby period is set, the movable end points of the various effect units 310 to 330 for which the standby period is set match. For this reason, the player who noticed or noticed that the movement did not start simultaneously with the operation of the first frame button 26 (the standby period was set), or noticed (uncomfortable feeling) next, the various effect units 310 Attention is paid to the game while expecting an effect that the movement of .about.330 ends simultaneously. Then, in the case where the movement of the production units 310 to 330 for which the standby period has been set ends at the same time, the first unit is confident that the specific unit 340 will move thereafter (while dipping into a sense of superiority). The one-frame button 26 can be operated. Therefore, in the process of operating the first frame button 26 (continuous hitting), the player's degree of attention to the various effect units 310 to 330 can be further improved.

  In addition, if a player who has not noticed the effect that the movement is not started simultaneously with the operation of the first frame button 26 is noticed that the movement of the various effect units 310 to 330 has ended at the same time, the first operation is performed next. The first frame button 26 can be operated with the expectation that the specific unit 340 may move when the frame button 26 is operated.

(Modification of the ninth embodiment)
A modification of the ninth embodiment will be described. In the ninth embodiment, similar to the modification of the sixth embodiment, the specific unit is movable when it is determined that it is time to move the specific unit 340 without the player operating the first frame button 26. Processing may be performed (see FIGS. 69 and 70). In the ninth embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment, the specific unit movable lottery process (S2505) may be executed in the first frame button corresponding process (FIG. 72). In such a configuration, when the standby period is set for the effect unit, the specific unit 340 is moved simultaneously with the end of the movement of the effect unit. Sense) can be impressed, and the interest in the game can be improved by giving an impression of smooth movement from the movement of the production unit to the specific unit 340. In particular, as shown in FIG. 82, when the standby periods are set for the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330, all the effect units 310 to 330 are movable. Since the specific unit 340 is moved simultaneously with the end of the game, a powerful effect can be provided by the player.

  Furthermore, in the ninth embodiment, when the special processing period is a period that is twice or more the movable period of the third effect unit 330 and the effect unit is movable from the normal process period to the special process period, Regardless of whether or not the first frame button 26 is operated, a corresponding effect unit standby flag may be stored. For example, in FIG. 82, if the special processing period is set to a period that is twice or more the movable period of the third effect unit 330 and the player operates the first frame button 26 immediately before time T46a, the third effect unit. Since 330 becomes movable from the normal processing period to the special processing period, the third effect unit standby flag is stored and the third effect unit 330 is moved to the end time regardless of whether the first frame button 26 is operated. The standby period may be set so as to coincide with the time until the specific unit moving process. By adopting such a configuration, the first frame button 26 is actively operated. However, since the operation timing is accidentally bad, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are used. It is possible to prevent the effect that the movement of the two ends at the same time does not occur, and the player can actively operate the first frame button 26.

Further, the eighth embodiment may be combined with the ninth embodiment. That is, for example, in FIG. 82, when the first frame button 26 is not operated by the player at time T46b, and the first frame button 26 is operated by the player at a time between time T46d and time T46e, The first rendering unit 310 performs the movable process after the standby period elapses, but the second rendering unit 32
The movable process is not executed for 0 and the third effect unit 330 (FIG. 78, S2907: NO, FIG. 79, S2911: NO). Therefore, when the second effect unit standby flag and the third effect unit standby flag are not stored, the second effect is made to end within the special processing period as in the eighth embodiment (time point T46f). You may make it perform the shortening movable process of the 2nd effect unit 320 and the 3rd effect unit 330 so that the movement of the unit 320 and the 3rd effect unit 330 may be complete | finished. According to this, the probability that the specific unit 340 is moved at the same time as the movement of all the production units 310 to 330 is increased, and the player can easily experience a powerful production (exhilaration).

(10th Embodiment)
A tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the timing for executing the specific unit moving process is changed with respect to the first embodiment. Since other aspects are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted here.

  First, the sound side RAM 154 of the present embodiment has the same configuration as that described in the second embodiment (see FIG. 55), and is provided with various effect unit movable flag storage areas 154h.

  Next, the rendering unit moving process (S2510) executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the rendering unit moving process. This process is basically the same process as the effect unit movable process described with reference to FIG. 48, and stores the effect unit movable flag with respect to the effect unit movable process described with reference to FIG. 48 (S2721 to S2721). This is a process to which S2723) is added. This effect unit moving process is executed in a first frame button handling process (FIG. 86) described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 83, after setting the movable period of the first effect unit 310 to the first effect unit movable period timer counter in step 2704, various effect unit movable flags provided in the voice side RAM 154 are set. The first effect unit movable flag is stored in the storage area 154h (S2721). Similarly, after setting the movable period of the second effect unit 320 to the second effect unit movable period timer counter in step 2707, the second effect unit movable flag is stored in the various effect unit movable flag storage area 154h provided in the audio side RAM 154. Is stored (S2722). In step 2710, after setting the movable period of the third effect unit 330 to the third effect unit movable period timer counter, the third effect unit movable flag is set in the various effect unit movable flag storage areas 154h provided in the sound side RAM 154. Store (S2723).

  Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This process is basically the same process as the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 36, and is a process in which a specific unit handling process (S1630) is added to the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. . Specifically, in this timer interrupt process, after the timer update process is executed in step 1616, the specific unit corresponding process (S1630) is executed.

  Next, the specific unit correspondence processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing specific unit handling processing.

In the specific unit handling process, first, it is determined whether or not the effect unit operation valid period timer counter is 0 (S3101). That is, it is determined whether or not a button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a. If it is determined that the effect unit operation valid period timer counter is not 0 (S3101: NO), the game of the current game time is determined from the information stored in the retained data area 154e in step 1706 in the main command response process (FIG. 37). It is determined whether or not the result is a winning result (S3102). If it is determined that the result is a winning result (S3102: YES), the values of the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters are acquired (S3103).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not all the first to third rendering unit movable period timer counters are 0 (S3104). That is, it is determined whether or not all of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are non-movable. If it is determined that the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters are all 0 (S3104: YES), it is determined whether or not all the first to third effect unit movable flags are stored (S3105). ). That is, the effect unit movable flag is stored after the effect unit is moved in the effect unit moving process (FIG. 83) and is deleted after the effect unit moving period timer counter becomes 0 (described later in S3106 and S3107). By determining whether or not the effect unit movable flag is stored, it is determined whether or not the effect unit has been moved to just before.

  When it is determined that all the first to third effect unit movable flags are not stored (S3105: NO), or when it is determined in step 3104 that at least one of the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters is not 0 (S3104: NO), if the corresponding effect unit movable flag is stored, the corresponding effect unit flag is deleted (S3106). For example, if it is determined in step 3105 that only the first effect unit movable flag is stored, the first effect unit movable flag is deleted in step 3106. If it is determined in step 3104 that only the first effect unit movable period timer counter is 0, if the first effect unit movable flag is stored in step 3106, the first effect unit movable flag is deleted.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that all the first to third effect unit movable flags are stored (S3105: YES), that is, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are movable. When it is completed at the same time (when the first movable part 311, the second movable part 321 and the third movable part 331 reach the respective first positions at the same time), the first to third effect unit movable flags are deleted. (S3107), specific unit movable process (S3108), specific unit movable effect command transmission process (S3109), effect unit operation effective period timer counter 0 clear process (S3110) are executed, and this specific unit corresponding process is terminated. The specific unit movable process in step 3108, the specific unit movable effect command transmission process in step 3109, and the effect unit operation effective period timer counter 0 clear process in step 3110 have been described in the first frame button corresponding process (FIG. 46). This is the same processing as Step 2507, Step 2508, and Step 2509.

  If it is determined in step 3101 that the effect unit operation valid period timer counter is 0 (S3101: YES), or if it is determined that the game result of the current game round is not a winning result (S3102: NO), The specific unit handling process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the first frame button handling process executed by the voice side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the first frame button handling process. This process is basically the same process as the first frame button corresponding process described with reference to FIG. 46, and in contrast to the first frame button corresponding process described with reference to FIG. 46, a specific unit movable process or the like (S2505). To S2509).

That is, if it is determined in step 2504 that the effect unit operation valid period timer counter is not 0 (S2504: NO), the effect unit moving process in step 2510 is executed. Note that the specific unit movable process and the like are executed in the specific unit corresponding process (FIG. 86) as described above.

  Next, when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the effect unit operation effective period, the first effect unit 310 (first movable portion 311), the second effect unit 320 (second movable portion 321), the second With reference to FIG. 87, a description will be given of the movable modes of the third effect unit 330 (third movable portion 331) and the specific unit 340 (specific movable portion 341). FIG. 87 is a timing chart showing the effect unit operation effective period, the state of the first frame button 26, the state of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340. In FIG. 87, an example in which the game times is a winning result and a button operation instruction (see FIG. 51) is displayed on the display screen 80a will be described.

  As described above, when the operation valid period is started, a button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a (see FIG. 51). At time T47a and the like, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are not moving, and the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters are all zero ( 85, S3104: NO), the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are non-movable (not movable) until immediately before time T47a (FIG. 85, S3105). : NO), the voice side MPU 152 does not execute the specific unit moving process.

  In this state, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at time T47b or the like, the audio side MPU 152 determines whether or not the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are movable. And the moving process of the rendering unit that is not moving is executed (FIG. 83). Then, in the process where the player operates (continuously strikes) the first frame button 26, the movement end points of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 coincide with each other at time T47c (FIG. 85). , S3104: YES, S3105: YES), the audio side MPU 152 executes the specific unit moving process (FIG. 85, S3108), and moves the specific unit 340.

  According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  First, in the present embodiment, in the process where the player operates the first frame button 26, when the game result is a winning result (FIG. 85, S3102: YES), the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, And when the movement end time of the third effect unit 330 coincides (the first movable part 311, the second movable part 321 and the third movable part 331 reach the first position at the same time) (FIG. 85, S3104: YES, S3105: YES), the specific unit 340 is movable (FIG. 85, S3108). For this reason, unless the player operates the first frame button 26, the specific unit 340 does not move, and the player can actively operate the first frame button 26.

  Further, the player simply operates the first frame button 26 (continuous hitting) while expecting that the movement end points of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 coincide with each other. ), And the timing for operating the first frame button 26 to intentionally match the movement end points of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 is changed. You can also. For this reason, even in the process of operating the first frame button 26 (continuous hitting) to the player, different game characteristics can be given, and the player himself can select how to operate the first frame button 26. Therefore, it can suppress that a player gets tired of a game at an early stage.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the specific unit 340 is moved simultaneously with the end of the movement of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330. Therefore, it is possible to impress the player with the force (exhilaration) of the specific unit 340, and it is possible to smoothly switch from the movement of the various effect units 310 to 330 to the movement of the specific unit 340.

(Modification of 10th Embodiment)
A modification of the tenth embodiment will be described. In the tenth embodiment, when the movement of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 is completed simultaneously, a specific unit movable flag or the like is stored in the voice-side RAM 154, and the player However, the specific unit 340 may be moved when the first frame button 26 is operated next time. In such a configuration, a player who notices that the movement of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 has ended at the same time will generate an effect in which the specific unit 340 moves. Next, the first frame button 26 can be operated while expecting this, and the player's attention to the various effect units 310 to 330 can be improved.

  In the tenth embodiment, in the determination process in step 3104, an affirmative determination may be made when the effect unit movable period timer counter is equal to or less than a predetermined value. That is, in addition to the case where the movements of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are completed at the same time, a slight difference that does not give the player a sense of incongruity is allowed. Also good. That is, the description of “simultaneous” in the tenth embodiment may be regarded as being acceptable in addition to a case where they are completely coincident with each other so long as the deviation does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, at least one effect unit (for example, the first effect unit 310 and the second effect unit 320) of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 is used. The specific unit 340 may be moved when the movement is completed at the same time.

  In the tenth embodiment, the specific movable portion 341 is not movable when the first movable portion 311, the second movable portion 321, and the third movable portion 331 reach the first position at the same time. When the first movable part 311, the second movable part 321 and the third movable part 341 reach the second position at the same time, the specific movable part 341 may reach the fourth position at the same time (see FIG. 10). ). According to this, when the specific movable part 341 moves, all the movable parts 311, 321, 333, and 343 of the present embodiment move simultaneously, so a more powerful effect is provided to the player. can do.

  In addition, when setting it as such a structure, the position detection means which detects the position of the 1st movable part 311, the 2nd movable part 321, and the 3rd movable part 331 is provided, for example, and the 1st movable part 311 and the 2nd movable part are included. The specific movable part 341 may be controlled based on the movable positions of the part 321 and the third movable part 331.

  In addition, the first movable portion 311, the second movable portion 321, and the third movable portion 341 do not reach the respective second positions at the same time, but the specific movable portion 341 moves when reaching the respective predetermined positions at the same time. It may be. In addition, at least one movable part (for example, the first movable part 311 and the second movable part 321) of the first movable part 311, the second movable part 321, and the third movable part 331 reaches each predetermined location at the same time. At this time, the specific unit 340 may be movable.

(Eleventh embodiment)
An eleventh embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the rendering unit moving process is changed with respect to the first embodiment. Since other aspects are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted here.

  First, the movable aspect of the 1st effect unit 310 of this embodiment, the 2nd effect unit 320, and the 3rd effect unit 330 is demonstrated. The first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 of the present embodiment have the same basic configuration as that described with reference to FIG. 9, but each has two movable modes. Yes.

  Specifically, the first movable portion 311 will be described with reference to FIG. 9, after reaching the second position (FIG. 9C) from the first position (FIG. 9A) to the first position. The first movable mode to return and the first position (FIG. 9A) to return to the first position after reaching the fifth position (FIG. 9B) between the first position and the second position. 2 movable modes are set. That is, in the second movable mode, the first movable portion 311 starts to move from the first position, and returns to the first position without reaching the second position. That is, the first effect unit 310 is set with a first movable mode and a second movable mode in which the movable distance of the first movable unit 311 is different.

  In the present embodiment, the fifth position is an intermediate position between the first position and the second position. Moreover, in this embodiment, the movable speed of the 1st movable part 311 is made equal in the 1st movable aspect and the 2nd movable aspect. For this reason, the movable period of a 1st movable aspect becomes longer than the movable period of a 2nd movable aspect.

  Similarly, although not shown in particular, in the second effect unit 320 and the third effect unit 330, the first movable mode that returns to the first position after reaching the second position from the first position, and the first position, A second movable mode is set in which a fifth position between the first position and the second position is reached and then returned to the first position. In the second effect unit 320 and the third effect unit 330, the movable speeds of the movable portions 321 and 331 are equal in the first movable mode and the second movable mode, and the movable period of the first movable mode is as follows. The second movable mode is longer than the movable period.

  Next, the configuration of the audio side RAM 154 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93. As shown in FIG. 88, the voice ROM 153 is provided with a prescribed operation number lottery table storage area 153g in addition to the various areas 153a to 153e. The prescribed operation number lottery table storage area 153g is an area in which a table to be referred to when determining the prescribed operation number (predetermined number) in the timer interrupt process described later (FIG. 89) is stored.

  In addition to the various areas 154a to 154g, the voice-side RAM 154 is provided with a specified operation count storage area 154q, an operation count counter area area (operation count storage means) 154r, and a specified operation count excess flag storage area 154s. The prescribed operation count storage area 154q is an area where the prescribed operation count of the first frame button 26 is set in a timer interrupt process (FIG. 89) described later. The operation number counter area 154r is an area that stores a counter that counts the number of times the player has operated the first frame button 26 in a prescribed operation number correspondence process (FIG. 91) described later. The specified operation count super flag storage area 154s is an area for storing the specified operation count super flag when the value of the operation count counter is equal to or larger than the value of the specified operation count counter in the later-described processing for handling the specified operation count (FIG. 91). It is.

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the audio side MPU 152 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This process is basically the same process as the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG.
6 is a process in which a process (S1631, S1632) for setting the prescribed number of operations of the first frame button 26 is added to the timer interrupt process described in FIG.

  Specifically, after the production unit operation valid period standby flag is erased in step 1613, a specified operation number lottery process is executed (S1631). That is, the specified operation number lottery process is executed when a button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a. In the prescribed operation number lottery process, the value of the prescribed operation number lottery counter is read from various counter areas 154g provided in the voice-side RAM 154. Here, the prescribed operation number lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”, and is configured such that 1 is added at a predetermined cycle such as a 2 msec cycle, and the maximum value is reached. After that, the configuration is initialized to 0. Then, the prescribed operation number lottery table stored in the prescribed operation number lottery table storage area 153g of the voice ROM 153 is referred to, and the prescribed operation number is determined based on the read value of the prescribed operation number lottery counter.

  In the present embodiment, the prescribed operation count lottery table storage area is set such that 10 times is won by 1/4, 15 times is won by 1/4, and 20 times is won by 1/2. 153g is set.

  Next, the prescribed number of operations selected in step 1631 is set in the prescribed number of operations storage area 154q provided in the voice side RAM 154 (S1632), and the processing after step 1614 is executed. When the first frame button corresponding process in step 1618 is executed, or when it is determined in step 1617 that the first frame button 26 is not operated (S1617: NO), the effect unit operation effective period timer counter is set. It is determined whether or not it is 0 (S1633). When it is determined that the production unit operation valid period timer counter is 0 (S1633: YES), the operation count counter is cleared to 0 (S1634), and the specified operation count exceeding the specified operation count flag storage area 154s of the voice side RAM 154 is set. If the super flag is stored, the supernumerary operation count super flag is deleted (S1635). The specified operation count super flag is a flag that may be stored by a specified operation count handling process (FIG. 91) described later. If it is determined in step 1635 that the specified operation times super flag clearing process or the production unit operation valid period timer counter is not 0 in step 1633 (S1633: NO), this timer interrupt process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the rendering unit moving process executed by the audio side MPU 152 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the rendering unit moving process. This process is basically the same process as the effect unit movable process described with reference to FIG. 48, and is a process in which a specified operation number corresponding process (S2724) is added to the effect unit movable process described with reference to FIG. It is. This effect unit movable process is a process executed in step 2519 of the first frame button corresponding process described with reference to FIG.

  In the effect unit movable process, first, a prescribed operation frequency response process is executed (S2724). Here, the prescribed number-of-operations handling process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the prescribed operation count handling process.

  In the prescribed operation count corresponding process, first, it is determined whether or not the prescribed operation count excess flag storage area 154s of the voice side RAM 154 is stored (S3201), and the prescribed operation count excess flag is stored. If it is determined that it is present (S3201: YES), the processing for handling the specified number of operations is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the prescribed operation count super flag is not stored (S3201: NO), the value of the operation count counter stored in the operation count counter area 154r of the voice side RAM 154 is acquired, and the acquired value A process of adding 1 to is executed (S3202).

  Subsequently, the specified operation count set in step 1632 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 89) is acquired from the specified operation count storage area 154q of the voice side RAM 154, and the value of the operation count counter added by 1 in step 3202 is acquired. It is determined whether or not the number of operations has been exceeded (S3203). If it is determined that the value of the operation number counter is equal to or greater than the prescribed operation number (S3203: YES), the prescribed operation number super flag flag is stored in the prescribed operation number super flag storage area 154s (S3204), and this regulation is performed as it is. The operation count handling process ends. As a result, once the specified operation count super flag is stored, a negative determination is made in step 3201. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the operation number counter is smaller than the specified operation number (S3203: NO), the specified operation number corresponding process is finished as it is.

  Returning to the description of the effect unit movable process (FIG. 90), after executing the prescribed operation count corresponding process in Step 2724, the value of the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters is acquired in Step 2701. If it is determined in step 2702 that the first effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2702: YES), it is determined whether or not the specified operation count super flag is stored (S2725). That is, it is determined whether or not the current rendering unit moving process is after the specified number of operations has been exceeded.

  When it is determined that the prescribed operation count excess flag is not stored (S2725: NO), the first effect unit first movable process is executed (S2703a), and it is determined that the prescribed operation count excess flag is stored. In the case (S2725: YES), the first effect unit second movable process is executed (S2703b).

  Here, the first effect unit first movable process is a process of moving the first effect unit 310 in the first movable mode, and the first effect unit second movable process is the first effect unit 310 described above. This is a process of moving in the second movable mode. That is, before the player's number of operations of the first frame button 26 exceeds the specified number of operations, the first effect unit 310 is moved in the first movable mode with a long movable period, and the player's first frame button 26 is moved. After the number of operations becomes equal to or greater than the specified number of operations, the first effect unit 310 is moved in the second movable mode in which the movable period is short.

  When the first effect unit first movable process of step 2703a is executed, or when the first effect unit second movable process of step 2703b is executed, the set process of the movable period of step 2704 is executed. If it is determined in step 2705 that the second effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2705: YES), it is determined whether or not the prescribed operation count excess flag is stored as in step 2725 (S2726). ).

  When it is determined that the prescribed operation count excess flag is not stored (S2726: NO), the second effect unit first movable process is executed (S2706a), and it is determined that the prescribed operation count excess flag is stored. In the case (S2726: YES), the second effect unit second movable process is executed (S2706b). The second effect unit first movable process is a process of moving the second effect unit 320 in the first movable mode, and the second effect unit second movable process is the second effect unit 320 moved second. It is the process which makes it move in a mode. That is, before the player's number of operations of the first frame button 26 exceeds the specified number of operations, the second effect unit 320 is moved in the first movable mode having a long movable period, and the player's first frame button 26 is moved. After the number of operations becomes equal to or greater than the specified number of operations, the second effect unit 320 is moved in the second movable mode in which the movable period is short.

When the second effect unit first movable process of step 2706a is executed, or when the second effect unit second movable process of step 2706b is executed, the set process of the movable period of step 2707 is executed. If it is determined in step 2708 that the third effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2708: YES), it is determined whether or not the prescribed operation count excess flag is stored as in step 2725 (S2727). ).

  When it is determined that the prescribed operation count excess flag is not stored (S2727: NO), the third effect unit first movable process is executed (S2709a), and it is determined that the prescribed operation count excess flag is stored. In the case (S2727: YES), the third effect unit second movable process is executed (S2709b). The third effect unit first movable process is a process of moving the third effect unit 330 in the first movable mode, and the third effect unit second movable process is the second effect of the third effect unit 330. It is the process which makes it move in a mode. That is, before the player's number of operations of the first frame button 26 exceeds the specified number of operations, the third effect unit 330 is moved in the first movable mode with a long movable period, and the player's first frame button 26 is moved. After the number of operations becomes equal to or greater than the specified number of operations, the third effect unit 330 is moved in the second movable mode in which the movable period is short.

  Next, when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the effect unit operation valid period, the first effect unit 310 (first movable part 311) and the second effect unit 320 (second movable part 321) are operated. The movable aspect of the third effect unit 330 (third movable portion 331) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 shows the effect unit operation effective period, the state of the first frame button 26, the first effect unit 310 (first movable portion 311), the second effect unit 320 (second movable portion 321), and the third effect unit 330 ( It is a timing chart which shows the state of the 3rd movable part 331).

  When the operation valid period starts, the button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a as described above (see FIG. 51). Since the value of the operation number counter is smaller than the value of the specified operation number counter at a time point before time point T48a (FIG. 90, 2725: NO, S2726: NO, S2727: NO), the audio side MPU 152 The unit first movable process (FIG. 90, S2703a), the second effect unit first movable process (FIG. 90, S2706a), and the third effect unit first movable process (FIG. 90, S2709a) are appropriately executed.

  On the other hand, after the time T48a, the value of the operation number counter becomes equal to or greater than the value of the specified operation number counter (FIG. 90, S2725: YES, S2726: YES, S2727: YES), so the first effect unit second movable process (S2703b). ), Second effect unit second movable process (S2706b), and third effect unit second movable process (S2709b) are appropriately executed. That is, after the time point T48a, one movable period of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 is shortened.

  According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the number of times the player has operated the first frame button 26 is counted, and when the number of operations is equal to or greater than the specified number of operations, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit. 330 is moved in the second movable mode. That is, when the player actively operates the first frame button 26, the movable period of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 is shortened. For this reason, the responsiveness with respect to the operation of the 1st frame button 26 can be further improved with respect to the player who operates the 1st frame button 26 positively, and the interest in a game can be improved.

  In addition, in the process of the player operating the first frame button 26 (continuous hitting), the player can change the movable mode of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 so that the player can It is possible to suppress getting tired of operating the one-frame button 26 at an early stage.

(Modification of the eleventh embodiment)
A modification of the eleventh embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, the specified number of operations may not be determined by lottery but may be a predetermined number.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the number of movements of the various effect units is counted instead of determining whether to execute the various effect unit second movable processing using the number of times the first frame button 26 is operated. Then, when the number of movements of the various production units is equal to or greater than the specified number of movements, the various production unit second movement processes may be executed. When it is set as such a structure, the time of reaching | attaining the specified number of times of operation differs in various production units. For example, the first effect unit 310 and the second effect unit 320 may move in the second movable mode, and the third effect unit 330 may move in the first movable mode. For this reason, the combination of the movable aspect of the various effect units 310-330 can be increased, and the player can experience the movable aspect of the various combinations of the various effect units 310-330.

  Further, in the eleventh embodiment, it is determined not to determine whether or not to execute the various effect unit second movable processes using the specified number of operations, but depending on the interval at which the player operates the first frame button 26. May be changed. For example, when the interval at which the player operates the first frame button 26 is equal to or shorter than a predetermined period, the various effect unit second movable processes are executed, and the interval at which the player operates the first frame button 26 is longer than the predetermined period. In such a case, the various effect unit first movable processes may be executed. In the case of such a configuration, for example, measurement means (calculation) that measures (calculates) a period (operation interval) from when the first frame button 26 is operated to when the first frame button 26 is operated next. Means) and an operation interval storage means for storing the period, the period stored in the operation interval storage means is compared with the predetermined period, and the period stored in the operation interval storage means is equal to or longer than the predetermined period. In this case, the various effect unit first movable processes may be executed, and when the period stored in the operation interval storage unit is less than the predetermined period, the various effect unit second movable processes may be executed.

  Further, in the eleventh embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment, the movable distance is made equal between the first movable mode and the second movable mode of the various effect units, and the movable speed of the second movable mode is set to the first movable mode. By making it faster than the movable speed of the aspect, the movable period of the second movable aspect may be shorter than the movable period of the first movable aspect. In addition, you may make it the movable period of a 2nd movable aspect become shorter than the movable period of a 1st movable aspect by varying a movable distance and a movable speed by a 1st movable aspect and a 2nd movable aspect.

  Further, in the eleventh embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game times is a win result. If the game result is a win result, the game result is a missed result. The probability that the specified number of operations is reduced may be higher than in some cases. That is, when the game result is a winning result, the various effect units 310 to 330 may be more easily moved in the second movable mode than when the game result is a lost result.

  Moreover, in the said 11th Embodiment, it is good also as a structure provided with the 3rd movable aspect etc. for which a production | generation unit movable process is further subdivided and a movable period is shorter than a 2nd movable aspect.

(Other embodiments)
It is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. And the structure of another following form may be applied individually with respect to the structure in each said embodiment, and may be applied in combination with each other. Moreover, you may apply the structure of the following other forms with respect to embodiment different from embodiment illustrated as application object.

(A) Other application examples (1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the example in which “100” is set in the hourly / counter counter in step 1305 of the special power termination process (FIG. 32) has been described. For example, it may be “50” or “120”.

  (2) In each of the above embodiments, the content of each game result is not limited to the above configuration. For example, the big prize opening 56a is opened once or a plurality of times in a long-time manner, and then the big prize opening 56a is short in time. It is good also as a structure provided with what is called rank up (RU) open | released once or several times in the aspect. In addition, although the winning / no-win lottery mode shifts from the low-probability mode to the high-probability mode, the support mode may have a hit result that remains the low-frequency support mode. For example, in the case of 4R probability variation, the support mode may be a low frequency support mode.

  (3) In each of the above embodiments, the hit numerical information in the low probability mode is included in the hit numerical information in the high probability mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hit numerical information in the low probability mode is high. It is good also as a structure which is not contained in the hit numerical value information in probability mode.

  (4) In each of the above-described embodiments, the type of the winning result by the sorting lottery regarding the first start port 54 and the type of the winning result by the sorting lottery regarding the second starting port 55 may be completely matched. In such a configuration, the lottery games may be executed in the order in which they are put on hold. In each of the above embodiments, lottery games may be executed in the order in which they are put on hold.

  (5) In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration of giving a game ball to the winning of a game ball to the variable winning device 56 or the like is not limited to the configuration of paying out the game ball directly, and the function of storing virtual game media In the configuration having the above, the virtual game medium may be provided.

  (6) In each of the above embodiments, the reserved symbols (holding advance notice) relating to the first and second lottery games are not configured to be displayed in the lower display area Dn of the symbol display device 80, and are provided separately from the symbol display device 80. The hold symbol may be displayed on the display screen of the display device, or the hold notice may be provided by setting the movable decorative member as a predetermined notice mode. A predetermined advance light emitting unit) may be turned on to make a hold advance notice, or a hold advance notice may be made by output of sound from the speaker unit 34, or a combination of all or a part of the above aspects. It is good also as a structure by which hold notice is performed by.

  (7) In each of the above embodiments, instead of the configuration in which the sound lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are separately provided, both the control devices 92 and 93 may be provided as one control device. The functions of the sound lamp control device 92 or the display control device 93 may be integrated into the main control device 91, and the functions of both the sound lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are integrated into the main control device 91. It is good also as a structure. Further, the voice lamp control device 92 is not configured to control the display control device 93 based on a command output from the main control device 91, but the display control device 93 is set to a voice lamp based on a command output from the main control device 91. It is good also as a structure which controls the control apparatus 92. FIG.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the sound lamp control device 92 is not configured to control the driving of the various effect units 310 to 330 and the specific unit 340, but as shown in FIG. It is good also as a structure which controls the drive of 310-330 and the specific unit 340. FIG. In this way, by configuring the display control device 93 to control the driving of the various rendering units 310 to 330 and the specific unit 340,
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a shift between the display effect displayed on the symbol display device 80, the first to third effect unit movable effects, and the specific unit movable effect. Further, the display control device 93 is configured to control the driving of the various effect units 310 to 330 and the specific unit 340, so that the first signal line group 170 and the first signal line group 170 connecting the audio lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are connected. When abnormality occurs in the two-signal line group 180 or noise is applied, it is possible to prevent the various effect units 310 to 330 and the specific unit 340 from malfunctioning. Further, in FIG. 93, the first frame button detection sensor 26 a and the second frame button detection sensor 27 a may be connected to the display control device 93. In addition, the main control device 91 may be configured to control driving of the various effect units 310 to 330 and the specific unit 340.

  (9) In the above embodiments, the first movable portion 311, the second movable portion 321, the third movable portion 331, and the specific movable portion 341 are not circular, but may be, for example, rectangular. Can be appropriately changed. In addition, the first movable part 311, the second movable part 321 and the third movable part 331 are not arranged so as to cover a part of the display screen 80a from the front when arranged at the first position. Alternatively, for example, the player may not be able to visually recognize the player when it is arranged at the first position, and may be visible to the player for the first time when the player is moved. Similarly, when the specific movable portion 341 is arranged at the third position, it may not be arranged so as to cover a part of the display screen 80a from the front, and when it is arranged at the third position. It may be made invisible to the player, and may be made visible to the player for the first time when the player moves. On the contrary, even when the first movable part 311, the second movable part 321, and the third movable part 331 are each arranged at the first position, the whole may be arranged on the display screen 80 a, Even when the specific movable part 341 is arranged at the third position, the whole may be arranged on the display screen 80a.

  (10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340 have the movable parts 311 and 321 along the rails 311a, 321a, 331a, and 341a. It is good also as a structure which not only moves 331 and 341 but moves while each movable part 311,321,331,341 moves. In addition to the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330, in response to the operation of the first frame button 26, it is rotated (not moved) while being placed at the initial position. An auxiliary effect unit that emits predetermined light may be provided.

  Furthermore, each rail 311a, 321a, 331a, 341a may have a curved shape instead of a linear shape, or may have a shape in which a linear portion and a curved portion are combined. That is, each movable part 311, 321, 331, 341 may have a part that moves in a curved line instead of moving only in a straight line. For example, when the first rail 311a has a shape in which a straight portion and a curved portion are combined, as shown in FIG. 94, a portion on one end side (the back side of the center frame 81) is a straight portion. It can be made into the shape where the part by the side of an edge part (edge part side located in the opening part 82) becomes a curve part. In this case, the movable aspect of the first effect unit 310 provided at the lower left corner of the opening 82 in front view will be described. As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95A, the first movable unit 311 is in the initial position. Are arranged at the first position. When the first driving unit 311c is in a driving state, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the first movable unit 311 moves along the linear portion of the first rail 312a, thereby causing a straight portion and a curved portion. After reaching the boundary, it moves along the curved portion as it is, and reaches the second position as the limit movable position as shown in FIG. 95 (c). And the 1st movable part 311 which reached the 2nd position returns to the 1st position of Drawing 95 (a), after becoming the state of Drawing 95 (b). That is, the first drive unit 311c may be configured to drive the first movable unit 341 in two steps (drive the straight line portion and drive the curved portion).

In addition, although the example which made the 1st rail 311a the shape which combined the linear part and the curved part was demonstrated here, the 2nd rail 321a, the 3rd rail 331a, and the specific rail 341a are the linear part and the curved part. It is good also as a shape which combined. In addition, a part of the first rail 311a, the second rail 321a, the third rail 331a, and the specific rail 341a may have a shape in which a straight portion and a curved portion are combined, or all the straight portions and a curved portion are combined. It is good also as a round shape.

  (11) In each of the above embodiments, the first movable portion 311, the second movable portion 321, the third movable portion 331, and the specific movable portion 341 are not movable along the rails 312a, 322a, 332a, 342a. For example, it may be supported by an arm, and may be moved by moving (stretching) the arm.

  (12) Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, any one of the second positions in the first movable part 311, the second movable part 321, and the third movable part 331 is the same position as the fourth position in the specific movable part 341. May be. In particular, in the fifth embodiment and the tenth embodiment, the specific unit 340 moves when the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are not movable. By adopting the configuration, the movable range of the specific movable portion 341 can be further increased, and a movable mode that gives a refreshing feeling to the player can be achieved. In addition, the first movable portion 311, the second movable portion 321, and the third movable portion 331 are appropriately controlled so that the first movable portion 311, the second movable portion 331, and the third movable portion 331 can control the first movable portion 311, the second movable portion 321, and the third movable portion 331. At least a part of the two positions may be the same position.

  (13) In each of the above embodiments, the first movable portion 311, the second movable portion 321, and the third movable portion 331 have a light emitting portion, and emit light along the rails 311 a, 321 a, 331 a, and 341 a. It may be movable. In this case, the emission color changes in the order of white → blue → green → red, and based on the game result and the number of operations, etc. It may be changed to red when the number of times is small.

  (14) In each of the above embodiments, the number of effect units is not three, but may be two, or four or more. Moreover, in the said 6th-9th, 11th embodiment, only one presentation unit may be sufficient.

  (15) In the first to ninth embodiments and the eleventh embodiment, the specific unit 340 may not be provided. In this case, in these embodiments, for example, instead of moving the specific unit 340, a predetermined moving image effect or the like may be displayed on the display screen 80a.

  (16) In each of the above embodiments, a plurality of specific units 340 may be provided. In this case, the specific unit 340 may be divided into a plurality of parts and constitute a single shape by moving. For example, in FIG. 8 described above, the third movable portion 331 and the specific movable portion 341 are each composed of a semicircle and have the same diameter, and are moved while rotating at the same time. A circle may be formed. In the case of such a configuration, the third rendering unit 330 becomes a specific unit and is moved by a specific unit moving process.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, when the player continues to press (operates) the first frame button 26 (so-called long press), the voice side MPU 152 causes the player to continuously press the first frame button 26. Various processes may be executed by determining that the user is operating (hitting continuously). In this case, in the button operation instruction, it is preferable to display “automatic continuous hit by long press” or the like to indicate to the player that the long press operation of the first frame button 26 is effective. Note that the pressing period of the first frame button 26 determined to be a long press may be changed according to the remaining period of the effect unit operation effective period. For example, when the remaining period of the effect unit operation effective period is 5 seconds or more, it is determined that the first frame button 26 is pressed for 3 seconds, and the remaining period of the effect unit operation effective period is 5 seconds. If it is shorter, it may be determined that the first frame button 26 has been pressed for a second when pressed. However, regardless of the remaining period of the effect unit operation effective period, it may be determined that the first frame button 26 is long-pressed when the first frame button 26 is pressed for a certain period (for example, 2 seconds).

  Further, in the case of the configuration in which the long press operation is validated in this way, the various effect units 310 to 330 and the specific unit 340 may be controlled in consideration of the gaming state. For example, in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that the specific unit 340 is movable, a portion where the effect displayed on the symbol display device 80 is the most exciting (the player expects the most) during the set effect unit effective period. The movement of the various rendering units 310 to 330 may be controlled so that the timing at which the portion) and the specific unit 340 are moved coincide with each other. In other embodiments other than the fifth embodiment, the various effect units 310 to 330 and the specific unit 340 may be moved in consideration of effects displayed on the symbol display device 80.

  (18) In each of the above embodiments, when it is determined that the second frame button 27 is operated by the player when the production unit operation is valid, the button operation is processed in the same manner as the first frame button operation. You may make it do. That is, depending on the player, when the first frame button 26 is operated (struck repeatedly), the second frame button 27 may be excessively operated. For this reason, during the effect unit operation valid period, the second frame button operation is also processed in the same manner as the first frame button operation, so that the probability that any one of the effect units becomes movable is increased. In addition, the various production units 310 to 340 can be sufficiently moved.

  (19) In each of the above embodiments, the length of the indicator M (effect unit operation effective period) may be changed according to the effect displayed on the symbol display device 80. For example, when an effect (so-called high-reliability effect) suggesting that a winning result is likely to occur is displayed on the symbol display device 80, the indicator M is displayed for a long time, and it is difficult to generate a winning result. When the suggestion effect (so-called low reliability effect) is displayed, the indicator M may be displayed short.

  In addition, the indicator M is configured to change the display color based on the decrease in the operation effective period (see FIG. 51), but the speed at which the display color changes may be different for each part. For example, when the remaining period of the operation effective period is displayed in white and the portion changes to black when the remaining period decreases, the indicator M indicates the period until the half of the portion displayed in white changes to black. You may make it shorter than the period until remaining white changes to black. That is, the indicator M may be configured such that the increase speed of the black portion is high at the beginning and the increase speed of the black portion from the middle is low. In this case, in steps 2602 and 2603 in the specific unit movable lottery process (FIG. 47), the determination may be made based on the remaining length of the indicator M (the length of the white portion). Even in the case of such a configuration, the length of the indicator M may be changed depending on the effect.

  By configuring the indicator M as described above, the game can be diversified, and the player can be prevented from getting bored early. Further, in Step 2602 and Step 2603 in the specific unit movable lottery process (FIG. 47), even if the length of the indicator M is changed based on the effect by making a determination based on the remaining length of the indicator M, It is possible to cope with common processing without increasing special processing.

  (20) The above embodiments may be appropriately combined. For example, the sixth embodiment is combined with the second to fifth embodiments, the timing (time point) at which the specific unit 340 is moved is determined, and at the timing, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the second effect unit 340 are determined. The first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 may be controlled so that the third effect unit 330 is not moving. Further, the seventh embodiment may be combined with the second to fifth embodiments, and a lottery for determining whether or not the specific unit 340 is movable may be performed. Further, the eighth embodiment may be combined with the second to fifth embodiments, and the movable mode of the effect unit may be changed so that the movement ends within the special processing period, or the ninth embodiment. May be combined with the second to fifth embodiments, and the movement start point of the effect unit may be delayed so that the movement end point of the various effect units coincides with the timing of moving the specific unit 340.

  Further, the tenth embodiment may be combined with the second to fifth embodiments, and the specific unit 340 may be moved when the movement end points of the effect units 310 to 330 match.

  Further, the eleventh embodiment is combined with the second to tenth embodiments so that the movable aspects of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are changed according to the player's operation. It may be. In particular, when the eleventh embodiment is combined with the eighth embodiment, the movable period is longer than the movable period of the first movable aspect when the movable period ends at a specific timing in the first movable aspect. When the various production units 310 to 330 are appropriately moved in the short first special movable period and the movement ends at a specific timing in the second movable mode, the movable period is longer than the movable period of the second movable mode. The various effect units 310 to 330 may be appropriately moved in the short second special movable period. In this case, when the first special movable period or the second special movable period is set, the movable distances of the various effect units 310 to 330 are shortened or the movable speed is increased as in the eighth embodiment. Configuration is adopted.

  In addition, you may make it possible to improve a player's interest in a game by combining each embodiment system suitably, or combining further what was combined.

  (21) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or game balls in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that wins when the player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

For example, when the present invention is applied to a slot machine, a rendering unit, a specific unit, a rendering button, and the like are provided, and when the reel starts to rotate, the reel stops during the rotation of the reel. The production unit may be moved by operating the production buttons later (successively), and the specific unit may be moved when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when winning). . Thus, when the present invention is applied to a slot machine, effects similar to those of the above embodiments can be obtained by appropriately combining the above embodiments.

(B) Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment The following describes features of the invention group extracted from each embodiment described above, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

(1) Feature A group Conventionally, a gaming machine including a button (operation means) that can be operated by a player and a plurality of movable parts that can be moved based on the player's button operation has been proposed (for example, a special feature). (See Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-128522). In such a gaming machine, the player can participate in the game by operating the button, so that the player's attention to the game can be increased.

  By the way, in a gaming machine having a button and a movable part as described above, when the player performs a button operation, the plurality of movable parts are simultaneously moved, and the player continuously operates the buttons within a predetermined period ( In the case of repeated striking), it is known to move the movable part continuously.

  However, in a gaming machine that moves a plurality of movable parts simultaneously according to button operations, if one movable part is moving, the button operation becomes invalid for the entire movable part, and the response of the movable part to the button operation Will fall. For this reason, in such a gaming machine, the player's willingness to operate the button is likely to decrease, and the player's attention to the game may decrease.

  In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game well, and the feature A group solves the problem.

Feature A1. Operation means (first frame button 26) that can be operated by the player;
Operation detection means (first frame button detection sensor 26a) for detecting whether or not the operation means is operated;
Normal effect means (first to third effect units) having normal movable parts (first to third movable parts 311 to 341) movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position. 310-330),
Based on the detection result of the operation detection means, normal effect means control means (function to execute the first frame button corresponding process in the MPU 152 of the sound lamp control device 92) for controlling the normal effect means,
Effective period determining means for determining the effective period of the operating means (function for determining the effective period of the sound lamp control device 92),
In the gaming machine provided with a plurality of the normal effect means, each normal movable part in the plurality of normal effect means is movable between the first position and the second position different from each other,
When it is determined that the operation means is operated within the effective period, the normal effect means control means determines that there is at least one normal effect means that is not movable, and the effect means that is not movable. A game machine that is characterized by moving.

According to the feature A1, when it is determined that there is at least one non-movable normal effect means when the operation means is operated within the effective period, the non-movable normal effect means is moved. For this reason, compared with the case where all the normal production | presentation means are moved simultaneously, the probability that the normal production | presentation means will move when a player operates an operation means becomes high. That is, the responsiveness (reactivity) of the normal performance means when the player operates the operation means can be increased. Therefore, the player can easily feel that the normal effect means moves in response to the operation means being operated. Thereby, a player can be made to operate an operation means positively, and a player's attention degree to a game can be improved.

  Feature A2. The normal effect means control means moves only one normal effect means that is not movable when it is determined that there are a plurality of non-movable normal effect means. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A2, since the normal effect means is moved one by one, the probability that the normal effect means is moved when the player operates the operation means is increased. That is, the responsiveness of the normal effect means when the player operates the operation means can be further increased. For this reason, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the effect (movable) of the normal effect means (normally movable portion) when the operation means is operated by the player can be fully enjoyed.

Feature A3. When the plurality of normal performance means are not movable, the normal movable portion is disposed at the first position, and the normal movable portion reaches the second position from the first position by moving. If the movable period until returning to the first position after that is the basic movable period, the basic movable period of at least one of the normal production means is longer than the basic movable period of the other normal production means,
When it is determined that there are a plurality of the non-moving normal effect means, the normal effect means control means determines that the normal effect means having the longest basic movable period among the non-moving normal effect means is the other normal effect means. The gaming machine according to Feature A2, wherein the gaming machine is preferentially moved over the normal production means.

  According to the feature A3, in order to move the normal performance means having the longest basic movable period preferentially over the other normal performance means, the player operates the operation means continuously (sequential hitting), thereby allowing a plurality of normal performance means. Is likely to move simultaneously. For this reason, the player can fully enjoy the effects (movable, combined) of the normal movable portion when operating the operating means, and the player's willingness to operate the operating means can be improved.

Feature A4. Movable history storage means (various effect unit movable flag storage area 154h of the sound lamp control device 92) for storing the movable history of the normal effect means;
When it is determined that there are a plurality of normal performance means that are not movable, the normal performance means control means is different from the normal performance means moved last time based on the movable history stored in the movable history storage means. The gaming machine according to Feature A2, wherein the normal production means is moved.

  According to the feature A4, it is difficult for the same normal effect means to move continuously. For this reason, the player can fully enjoy the movement of the different normal performance means by operating the operation means. Therefore, the player's willingness to operate the operation means can be further improved.

Feature A5. Information acquisition means (a function for executing the processing of S404 and S409 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Grant determination means for executing whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the success / failure information group in the grant information (executes the special information determination process in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) Function)
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be judged corresponds to the success / failure information group, a bonus game (for example, a variable prize device) is given to the player. Privilege providing means (function to execute the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for providing the opening / closing control mode 56).
When it is determined that the special information corresponds to the success / failure information group, the normal effect means control means has a probability of moving the specific normal effect means other than the normal information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that it is higher than a probability of moving the effect means.

  According to the feature A5, when the special information corresponds to the success / failure information group (when it is a winning result), the specific normal effect means is easily movable. For this reason, in the process of operating the operation means (continuous hit), the player can guess the result of the game times by checking whether or not the specific normal effect means is more movable than the other normal effect means. . In other words, it is possible to give the player a new gameability of guessing the result of the game times by operating the operation means. Therefore, the player's attention to the game can be improved by diversifying the game.

  A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a start pitching portion provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; In the configuration including the “information acquisition means”, instead of the configuration of “acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition”, “the game ball enters the start ball entrance portion” It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which special information is acquired based on what has been done.

Feature A6. It has a specific movable part (specific movable part 341) that is movable between a third position and a fourth position different from the third position, and the specific movable part is movable by moving the specific movable part. A specific production means (specific unit 340) that is more likely to give a result more advantageous to the player than if not,
When it is determined that a predetermined first condition is satisfied within the effective period, the specific effect means control means for controlling the specific effect means (specific movable processing in the MPU 152 of the sound lamp control device 92 is executed) The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the gaming machine has a function).

  As in the feature A6, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine including a specific effect means different from the normal effect means. Here, controlling the specific effect means within the effective period includes starting the movement of the specific effect means within the effective period and ending the movement of the specific effect means after the effective period has elapsed.

  Feature A7. The gaming machine according to Feature A6, wherein the specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means as one of the first conditions when it is determined that the normal effect means is not movable. .

  Feature A8. When the specific effect means control means determines that the specific effect means control means is moved, the normal effect means control means determines that the specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means after the operation means is operated. The gaming machine according to Feature A6 or A7, wherein the normal performance means is not moved even when operated.

According to the features A7 and A8, it becomes difficult for the normal effect means and the specific effect means to move simultaneously within the effective period, and the effect means that the player should pay attention to can be clearly distinguished. In the configuration including the feature A8, when the specific effect means control means determines to move the specific effect means,
Even if there is a non-movable normal effect means when the player operates the operation means, it is possible to produce a difference in the effect that the normal effect means is not moved (so-called law-displacement). For this reason, in the process of operating the operation means, the player can also be given a new gameability of searching for an effect (state) that the normal effect means that should be movable does not move, and the player's attention to the game is increased. It can be improved.

  Feature A9. The normal movable part in the plurality of normal effect means and the specific movable part in the specific effect means move at least one normal movable part in the normal effect means to the second position, and the specific movable part in the specific effect means The gaming machine according to the feature A7 or A8, wherein the gaming machine is shaped so as to come into contact when it is moved to the fourth position.

  When the configuration of the feature A7 or A8 is provided as in the feature A9, since the normal effect means and the specific effect means do not move simultaneously, the normal movable portion of the normal effect means moves to the second position and the specific effect. When the specific movable part of the means is moved to the fourth position, it may be shaped to contact each other. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means can be improved, and the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means can have a novel shape or , It can be a powerful shape.

(2) Feature Group B Conventionally, a gaming machine including a button (operation means) that can be operated by a player and a movable portion that can move based on the button operation of the player has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2014 2014). -128522). In such a gaming machine, the player can participate in the game by operating the button, so that the player's attention to the game can be increased.

  In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to improve a player's attention to the game well by devising a method of controlling the movable portion, and the feature B group solves the problem.

Feature B1. Operation means (first frame button 26) that can be operated by the player;
Operation detection means (first frame button detection sensor 26a) for detecting whether or not the operation means is operated;
Normal effect means (first to third effect units) having normal movable parts (first to third movable parts 311 to 341) movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position. 310-330),
Based on the detection result of the operation detection means, normal effect means control means (function to execute the first frame button corresponding process in the MPU 152 of the sound lamp control device 92) for controlling the normal effect means,
In a gaming machine comprising: an effective period determining means for determining an effective period of the operating means (a function for determining an effective period of the sound lamp control device 92);
Specific timing determination means for determining a specific timing within the effective period when it is determined that a predetermined first condition is satisfied (a function for determining a specific timing of the sound lamp control device 92 (a function for executing the processing of S2805) ))
When it is determined that the operation means is operated within the effective period and the specific timing is determined, the normal effect means control means determines that a predetermined second condition is satisfied. The game machine is characterized in that the normal performance means is moved so that the movement of the normal performance means ends at the specific timing.

According to the feature B1, when the specific timing is determined, when the normal performance means determines that the second condition is satisfied, the normal performance means is moved so that the movement of the normal performance means ends at the specific timing. . For this reason, in such a situation, the normal effect means does not move after the specific timing, so that the player can smoothly focus on another effect that starts after the specific timing, and the player's degree of attention to the game Can be improved.

  Feature B2. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the normal effect means control means changes the control of the normal effect means based on a remaining period until the specific timing.

  According to the feature B2, the control of the normal effect means changes based on the remaining period until the specific timing. For this reason, in the process of operating the operation means, the player can be given a new gameability of checking whether or not the specific timing has been determined by paying attention to the movement of the normal effect means. The degree of attention to the game can be improved.

Feature B3. In the case where the normal performance means is not movable, the normal movable portion is disposed at the first position,
The normal performance means control means is non-movable when the movable period from the first position to the second position after returning from the first position to the first position is defined as a basic movable period. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, wherein the normal performance means that is in the middle and the basic movable period is equal to or less than a period from the time when the operation means is operated to the specific timing is moved.

  According to the feature B3, just before the specific timing, only the normal effect means whose basic movable period is shorter than the period until the specific timing is moved. For this reason, in the process of operating the operation means, a new game in which the player guesses whether or not the specific timing has been determined by looking for an effect (state) that the normal effect means that should be movable does not move. Sex can be imparted and the player's attention to the game can be improved.

Feature B4. In the case where the normal performance means is not movable, the normal movable portion is disposed at the first position,
The normal performance means control means is non-movable when the movable period from the first position to the second position after returning from the first position to the first position is defined as a basic movable period. And when it is determined that there is the normal effect means whose basic movable period is longer than the period from the time when the operating means is operated to the specific timing, the normal effect means is moved from the basic movable period to the movable period. The game machine according to Feature B2, wherein the game machine is movable in a short shortened movable period.

  According to the feature B4, immediately before the specific timing, the normal rendering means whose basic movable period is longer than the period until the specific timing is moved in the shortened movable period. For this reason, in the process of operating the operation means, the player can be given a new gameability of inferring whether or not the specific timing has been determined from the movable period of the normal effect means, and the player's game Attention can be improved.

  Feature B5. The normal effect means control means moves the normal effect means by moving the normal effect means so that the normal movable portion returns from the first position to the first position without reaching the second position. The gaming machine according to Feature B4, wherein a period is the shortened movable period.

  According to the feature B5, since the movable period is shortened by shortening the movable distance, the player can be focused on how to move the normal movable part (reaching point), and the player's attention to the normal movable part The degree can be improved.

Feature B6. The normal effect means control means moves the normal effect means by moving the normal effect means at a higher speed than when moving the normal effect means during the basic movable period, thereby reducing the movable period of the normal effect means. The gaming machine according to Feature B4, wherein:

  According to the feature B6, since the movable period is shortened by increasing the movable speed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the moving state (speed) of the normal movable part, and the player's attention to the normal movable part The degree can be improved.

Feature B7. In the case where the normal performance means is not movable, the normal movable portion is disposed at the first position,
Assuming that the period from when the normal movable part reaches the second position from the first position to the first position after returning to the first position as the basic movable period, the period before the basic movable period is reached from the specific timing. A special processing period determining means (a function for determining a special processing period in the MPU 152 of the sound lamp control device 92) that determines a predetermined period up to the time as a special processing period
When the normal effect means control means determines that the operation means has been operated within the special processing period, the basic movable period is less than a period from when the operation means is operated to the specific timing. The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the movement of the normal effect means is delayed, and the delayed movement end time of the normal effect means coincides with the specific timing.

  According to the feature B7, the movement of the normal effect means is delayed immediately before the specific timing. For this reason, in the process of operating the operation means, the player is inferred whether or not the specific timing has been determined by searching for whether or not the normal performance means is moved after the operation means is operated. Gameability can be imparted, and the player's attention to the game can be improved. Further, in the feature B7, since the movable end point of the normal effect means is made coincident with the specific timing, the player can be more smoothly focused on another effect started after the specific timing.

Feature B8. It has a specific movable part (specific movable part 341) that is movable between a third position and a fourth position different from the third position, and the specific movable part is movable by moving the specific movable part. A specific production means (specific unit 340) that is more likely to give a result more advantageous to the player than if not,
If it is determined that a predetermined third condition is satisfied within the effective period, the specific effect means control means for controlling the specific effect means (specific movable processing in the MPU 152 of the sound lamp control device 92 is executed) Function), and
When the specific effect means control means determines that the movement of the normal effect means is controlled to end at the specific timing as one of the third conditions, the specific effect means moves after the specific timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein:

  According to the feature B8, as another effect that starts after the specific timing, the specific effect means that is likely to give a result advantageous to the player is moved. For this reason, the movement of the normal effect means is completed by the specific timing, so that the player can smoothly focus on the specific effect means. Here, controlling the specific effect means within the effective period includes starting the movement of the specific effect means within the effective period and ending the movement of the specific effect means after the effective period has elapsed.

Feature B9. The normal movable part in the normal effect means and the specific movable part in the specific effect means move the normal movable part in the normal effect means to the second position, and the specific movable part in the specific effect means is the fourth position. The gaming machine according to Feature B8, wherein the gaming machine has a shape that comes into contact when moved up to.

  When the configuration of the feature B8 is provided as in the feature B9, the normal effect means and the specific effect means do not move at the same time, so that the normal movable portion of the normal effect means moves to the second position and the specific effect means It can also be set as the shape which mutually contacts when a specific movable part moves to a 4th position. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means can be improved, and the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means can have a novel shape or , It can be a powerful shape.

  Feature B10. The specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means when it is determined that the operation means is operated after the specific timing within the effective period, according to the feature B8 or B9, Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B10, in the case where the configuration such as the feature B2 is provided, the player who notices that the movement of the normal performance means has changed because the specific timing is set, and that the specific effect means moves thereafter. The operating means can be operated in a state understood only by itself. For this reason, it is possible to further improve the degree of attention of the player to the normal performance means.

  Feature B11. The gaming machine according to feature B8 or B9, wherein the specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means at the specific timing.

  According to the feature B11, when the configuration such as the feature B2 is provided, the player who notices that the movement of the normal effect means has changed because the specific timing is set, the subsequent action of the specific effect means moves. It is possible to wait for a specific timing to be reached in a state understood only by itself. For this reason, it is possible to further improve the degree of attention of the player to the normal performance means.

Feature B12. A specific effect means movement determining means (moving a specific unit of the sound lamp control device 92) that determines whether or not to move the specific effect means when the operation means is operated within the effective period and before the specific timing. A function to execute a lottery process)
When the normal effect means control means decides to move the specific effect means by the specific effect means moving determination means as one of the second conditions, the normal effect means moves at the specific timing. The normal production means is moved so as to end,
The specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means as one of the third conditions when the specific effect means movement determining means determines that the specific effect means is movable. The gaming machine according to any one of features B8 to B11.

  According to the feature B12, it is determined whether or not to operate the specific effect means when the operation means is operated by the player. That is, even if the specific timing is determined, the specific effect means does not move if the player does not operate the operation means. For this reason, it can suppress that a player's interest in operating the operation means falls.

  Feature B13. A plurality of the normal effect means are provided, and each of the normal movable parts of the plurality of normal effect means is movable between the first position and the second position which are different from each other. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B12.

  It can also be set as the structure provided with multiple normal production | presentation means like the feature B13. And when all the movement end points of the plurality of normal presentation means coincide with the specific timing, another presentation will be started at the same time as all the movements of the plurality of normal presentation means are finished. A powerful effect (exhilaration) can be provided.

  Feature B14. The game machine according to Feature B13, wherein the normal performance means has a movable period of at least one of the normal performance means longer than other movable periods.

  According to the feature B14, since the movable period of at least one of the plurality of normal presentation means is longer than the other movable periods, the movable state (combination) of the plurality of normal presentation means can be diversified. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored at an early stage of watching the movement of the normal effect means.

(3) Feature C group Conventionally, a gaming machine including a button (operation means) that can be operated by a player and a plurality of movable parts that can move based on the player's button operation has been proposed (for example, a special feature). (See Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-128522). In such a gaming machine, the player can participate in the game by operating the button, so that the player's attention to the game can be increased.

  In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the player's attention to the game well by devising how to control the movable part, and the feature C group solves the problem.

Feature C1. Operation means (first frame button 26) that can be operated by the player;
Operation detection means (first frame button detection sensor 26a) for detecting whether or not the operation means is operated;
Normal effect means (first to third effect units) having normal movable parts (first to third movable parts 311 to 341) movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position. 310-330),
Based on the detection result of the operation detection means, normal effect means control means (function to execute the first frame button corresponding process in the MPU 152 of the sound lamp control device 92) for controlling the normal effect means,
Effective period determining means for determining the effective period of the operating means (function for determining the effective period of the sound lamp control device 92);
It has a specific movable part (specific movable part 341) that is movable between a third position and a fourth position different from the third position, and the specific movable part is movable by moving the specific movable part. A specific production means (specific unit 340) that is more likely to give a result more advantageous to the player than if not,
When it is determined that a predetermined first condition is satisfied within the effective period, the specific effect means control means for controlling the specific effect means (specific movable processing in the MPU 152 of the sound lamp control device 92 is executed) Function), and
In the gaming machine provided with a plurality of the normal effect means, each normal movable part in the plurality of normal effect means is movable between the first position and the second position different from each other,
When the normal moving means is non-movable, the normal movable portion is disposed at the first position, and after the normal movable portion reaches the second position from the first position by moving. When the movable period until returning to the first position is a basic movable period, the basic movable period of at least one of the normal performance means is longer than the other basic movable periods,
As one of the first conditions, the specific effect means control means is configured such that at least a part of the normal movable parts of the plurality of normal effect means having different basic movable periods move simultaneously within the effective period. A game machine characterized in that, when it is determined that a predetermined location is reached, the specific effect means is moved.

According to the feature C1, as one of the first conditions, when at least a part of the normal movable parts of the normal performance means having different movable periods move and reach each predetermined location at the same time, an advantageous result is given to the player. The specific effect means that is easy to be played (which is likely to be a hit result) moves. For this reason, the player can be made to actively operate the operation means, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, in such a configuration, the player can operate the operation means while expecting that at least a part of the normal movable parts of the normal effect means will reach a predetermined location at the same time accidentally. It is also possible to change the timing at which the operating means is operated so that at least some of the normal moving parts of the normal rendering means reach a predetermined location simultaneously. For this reason, even in the process of operating the operating means to the player, different game characteristics can be imparted, and the player can select how to operate the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  The term “simultaneous” here includes a slight difference that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable, in addition to the case where the normal movable part of the normal production means reaches the predetermined location completely simultaneously. Further, controlling the specific effect means within the effective period here includes starting the movement of the specific effect means within the effective period and ending the movement of the specific effect means after the effective period has elapsed.

  Feature C2. The specific rendering means control means moves the specific rendering means when it is determined that the normal movable parts of the plurality of normal rendering means simultaneously reach the first positions, respectively. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C2, the specific effect means moves when the normal movable parts of the plurality of normal effect means reach the respective first positions at the same time. For this reason, it is possible to make the player more impressed with the movement of the specific effect means, and the movement of the specific effect means can be more powerful (exhilarating), and the player can move the specific effect means. The expectation for can be improved.

  Feature C3. The normal movable part in the normal effect means and the specific movable part in the specific effect means move the normal movable part in the normal effect means to the second position, and the specific movable part in the specific effect means is the fourth position. The gaming machine according to Feature C2, wherein the gaming machine has a shape that comes into contact when moved up to.

  According to the feature C3, since the configuration of the feature C2 is provided and the normal effect means and the specific effect means do not move at the same time, the normal movable part of the normal effect means moves to the second position and the specific effect means is specified. When the movable part is moved to the fourth position, it may be shaped to contact each other. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means can be improved, and the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means can have a novel shape or , It can be a powerful shape.

  Feature C4. The specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means when it is determined that the normal movable parts of the plurality of normal effect means simultaneously reach the second positions, respectively. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C4, the specific effect means moves when it is determined that the normal movable parts of the plurality of normal effect means simultaneously reach the respective second positions. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful effect produced by the simultaneous movement of the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means, and expectation that the player's specific effect means will move. The feeling can be improved.

Feature C5. The normal movable part in the normal effect means and the specific movable part in the specific effect means move the normal movable part in the normal effect means to the second position, and the specific movable part in the specific effect means is the fourth position. The gaming machine according to Feature C4, wherein the gaming machine has a shape that does not come into contact when moved up to.

  According to the feature C5, when the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means move, it can be suppressed that the movable parts come into contact with each other, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.

  Feature C6. When the specific effect means control means determines that the specific effect means control means is moved, the normal effect means control means determines that the specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means after the operation means is operated. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the normal performance means is not moved even when operated.

  According to the feature C6, when the configuration such as the feature C2 is provided, it becomes difficult for the normal effect means and the specific effect means to move simultaneously, and the effect means that the player should pay attention to can be clearly distinguished. In addition, when the features C2 and C4 and the like are provided, it is possible to suppress a sense of incongruity in production that the normal production means starts moving after the specific production means is moved.

  Feature C7. When it is determined that the operation means is operated within the effective period, the normal effect means control means determines that there is at least one normal effect means that is not movable, and the effect means that is not movable. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the game machine is movable.

  According to the feature C7, since the non-moving normal effect means is moved, the probability that the normal effect means is moved when the player operates the operation means as compared to the case where all the normal effect means are simultaneously moved. Becomes higher. That is, the responsiveness (reactivity) of the normal performance means when the player operates the operation means can be increased. Therefore, the player can easily feel that the normal effect means moves in response to the operation means being operated. Thereby, a player can be made to operate an operation means positively, and a player's attention degree to a game can be improved.

Feature C8. The plurality of normal performance means have different basic movable periods,
The normal effect means control means moves only one of the non-moving normal effect means when it is determined that there are a plurality of the non-movable normal effect means, as described in the feature C7. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C8, since the normal effect means is moved one by one, the probability that the normal effect means moves when the player operates the operation means increases. That is, the responsiveness of the normal effect means when the player operates the operation means can be further increased. For this reason, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the effect (movable) of the normal effect means (normally movable portion) when the operation means is operated by the player can be fully enjoyed.

  Feature C9. When it is determined that there are a plurality of the non-moving normal effecting means, the normal effecting means control means determines that the normal effecting means having the longest basic movable period among the non-moving normal effecting means is the other The gaming machine according to Feature C8, wherein the gaming machine is moved preferentially over the normal performance means.

  According to the feature C9, since the normal performance means having the longest basic movement period is preferentially moved over the other normal performance means, there is a probability that a plurality of normal performance means can be moved simultaneously when the player operates the operation means. Get higher. For this reason, the player can fully enjoy the effects (movable, combined) of the normal movable portion when operating the operating means, and the player's willingness to operate the operating means can be improved.

(4) Feature Group D Conventionally, a gaming machine including a button (operation means) that can be operated by a player and a movable portion that can be moved based on the player's button operation has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2014 2014). -128522). In such a gaming machine, the player can participate in the game by operating the button, so that the player's attention to the game can be increased.

  In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to improve a player's attention to the game well by devising a method of controlling the movable part, and the feature D group solves the problem.

Feature D1. Operation means (first frame button 26) that can be operated by the player;
Operation detection means (first frame button detection sensor 26a) for detecting whether or not the operation means is operated;
Normal effect means (first to third effect units) having normal movable parts (first to third movable parts 311 to 341) movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position. 310-330),
Based on the detection result of the operation detection means, normal effect means control means (function to execute the first frame button corresponding process in the MPU 152 of the sound lamp control device 92) for controlling the normal effect means,
In a gaming machine comprising: an effective period determining means for determining an effective period of the operating means (a function for determining an effective period of the sound lamp control device 92);
When the normal rendering means is not movable, the normal movable part is disposed at the first position, and after the normal movable part reaches the second position from the first position during the basic movable period. A first movable mode returning to the first position, and a second movable mode in which the normal movable unit is movable in a shortened movable period in which the movable period is shorter than the basic movable period of the first movable aspect;
When it is determined that the operation means has been operated within the effective period, the normal effect means control means determines that a predetermined first condition resulting from the operation status of the operation means of the player is not satisfied. Then, the game machine is characterized in that the normal effect means is moved in the first movable mode and the normal effect means is moved in the second movable mode when it is determined that the first condition is satisfied.

  According to the feature D1, the movable aspect of the normal effect means is made different depending on the operation state of the player. For this reason, the player can experience different movable modes of the normal effect means by changing the operation status of the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early in operating the operation means, and the player's attention to the game can be improved.

  Feature D2. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein in the second movable aspect, the normal movable part returns from the first position to the first position without reaching the second position.

  According to the feature D2, since the movable period is shortened by shortening the movable distance, the player can be focused on how to move the normal movable part (reaching point), and the player's attention to the game is improved. it can.

  Feature D3. In the second movable aspect, the movable speed of the normal movable part is faster than the movable speed of the first movable aspect, and the gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2.

  According to the feature D3, since the movable period is shortened by increasing the movable speed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the moving state (speed) of the normal movable portion, and improve the player's attention to the game. it can.

Feature D4. Operation number storage means (operation number counter area 154r of the sound lamp control device 92) for storing the number of times the operation means is operated within the effective period;
The normal effect means control means moves the normal effect means in the first movable mode when it is determined that the number of times stored in the operation count storage means is less than a predetermined number as one of the first conditions, According to any one of the features D1 to D3, the normal effect means is moved in the second movable manner when it is determined that the number of times stored in the operation number storage means is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. Game machines.

  According to the feature D4, the movable aspect of the normal effect means changes depending on the number of times the player operates the operation means. For this reason, when the player actively operates the operation means, the normal performance means is easily moved in the second movable mode, and the responsiveness of the normal performance means to the operation of the operation means can be improved.

Feature D5. Within the effective period, there is an operation interval storage means for storing an operation interval at which the operation means is operated,
The normal presentation means control means moves the normal presentation means in the first movable mode when the operation interval is determined to be equal to or greater than a predetermined interval as one of the first conditions, and the operation interval is the predetermined interval. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D3, wherein the normal performance means is moved in the second movable mode when it is determined that the distance is less than the interval.

  According to the feature D5, the movable aspect of the normal effect means changes depending on the operation interval at which the player operates the operation means. For this reason, the player can select the movable mode of the normal effect means by the player himself, and can prevent the player from getting bored early in operating the operation means. Moreover, since a movable aspect changes with operation intervals, the player can also enjoy the movement of the 1st movable aspect of a normal production | presentation means and a 2nd movable aspect alternately, for example.

Feature D6. Information acquisition means (a function for executing the processing of S404 and S409 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Grant determination means for executing whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the success / failure information group in the grant information (executes the special information determination process in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) Function)
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be judged corresponds to the success / failure information group, a bonus game (for example, a variable prize device) is given to the player. Privilege providing means (function to execute the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for providing the opening / closing control mode 56).
When it is determined that the special information corresponds to the success / failure information group by the grant determination means, the normal presentation means control means causes the special information to be added to the success / failure information group by the grant determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D5, wherein the probability that the first condition is satisfied is higher than a case where it is not determined to be compatible.

  According to the feature D6, when the special information corresponds to the success / failure information group (when it is a winning result), the first condition is easily established. That is, the normal effect means is easily moved in the second movable mode. For this reason, in the process of operating the operation means (continuous hit), the player can infer the result of the game times by checking at which stage the normal performance means becomes the second movable mode. In other words, by operating the operation means, it is possible to give the player a new gameability of guessing the result of the game times, and by diversifying the game, the player's attention to the game can be improved. .

A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a start pitching portion provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; In the configuration including the “information acquisition means”, instead of the configuration of “acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition”, “the game ball enters the start ball entrance portion” It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which special information is acquired based on what has been done.

Feature D7. A plurality of the normal effect means are provided, and the normal movable parts in the plurality of normal effect means are movable between the first position and the second position, which are different from each other,
When it is determined that the operation means is operated within the effective period, the normal effect means control means determines that there is at least one normal effect means that is not movable, and the effect means that is not movable. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the game machine is movable.

  According to the feature D7, when it is determined that there is at least one normal performance means that is not movable, the normal performance means that is not movable is moved. For this reason, compared with the case where all the normal production | presentation means are moved simultaneously, the probability that the normal production | presentation means will move when a player operates an operation means becomes high. That is, the responsiveness (reactivity) of the normal performance means when the player operates the operation means can be increased. Therefore, the player can easily feel that the normal effect means moves in response to the operation means being operated. Thereby, a player can be made to operate an operation means positively, and a player's attention degree to a game can be improved.

  Feature D8. The normal effect means control means moves only one of the non-movable normal effect means when it is determined that there are a plurality of the non-movable normal effect means, as described in the feature D7 Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D8, since the normal effect means is moved one by one, the probability that the normal effect means moves when the player operates the operation means is increased. That is, the responsiveness of the normal effect means when the player operates the operation means can be further increased. For this reason, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the effect (movable) of the normal effect means (normally movable portion) when the operation means is operated by the player can be fully enjoyed.

Feature D9. At least one of the normal effect means in the plurality of normal effect means has the basic movable period longer than the basic movable period of other normal effect means, and the shortened movable period is shorter than other normal effect means. It is longer than the movable period,
When it is determined that there are a plurality of normal performance means that are not movable, the normal performance means control means is the most of the normal performance means that are not movable when moving in the first movable mode. When the normal performance means having a long basic movable period is preferentially moved over the other normal performance means and is moved in the second movable mode, the most shortened movable period of the normal performance means that is not movable is The gaming machine according to Feature D8, wherein the long normal performance means is moved preferentially over other normal performance means.

  According to the feature D9, since the normal performance means having a long basic movable period or a shortened movable period is preferentially moved over other normal performance means, a plurality of normal performance means can be moved simultaneously by the player operating the operation means. The probability of doing is increased. For this reason, the player can fully enjoy the effects (movable, combined) of the normal movable portion when operating the operating means, and the player's willingness to operate the operating means can be improved.

Feature D10. Movable history storage means (various effect unit movable flag storage area 154h of the sound lamp control device 92) for storing the movable history of the normal effect means;
When it is determined that there are a plurality of normal performance means that are not movable, the normal performance means control means is different from the normal performance means moved last time based on the movable history stored in the movable history storage means. The gaming machine according to Feature D8, wherein the normal performance means is moved.

  According to the feature D10, it is difficult for the same normal effect means to move continuously. For this reason, the player can fully enjoy the movement of the different normal performance means by operating the operation means. Therefore, the player's willingness to operate the operation means can be further improved.

Feature D11. Information acquisition means (a function for executing the processing of S404 and S409 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Grant determination means for executing whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the success / failure information group in the grant information (executes the special information determination process in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) Function)
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be judged corresponds to the success / failure information group, a bonus game (for example, a variable prize device) is given to the player. Privilege providing means (function to execute the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for providing the opening / closing control mode 56).
When it is determined that the special information corresponds to the success / failure information group, the normal effect means control means has a probability of moving a specific normal effect means other normal effect means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D7 to D10, wherein the gaming machine is set to be higher than a probability of being moved.

  According to the feature D11, when the special information corresponds to the success / failure information group (when it is a winning result), the specific normal effect means is easy to move. For this reason, in the process of operating the operation means (continuous hit), the player can guess the result of the game times by checking whether or not the specific normal effect means is more movable than the other normal effect means. . In other words, by operating the operation means, it is possible to give the player a new gameability of guessing the result of the game times, and by diversifying the game, the player's attention to the game can be improved. .

  A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a start pitching portion provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; In the configuration including the “information acquisition means”, instead of the configuration of “acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition”, “the game ball enters the start ball entrance portion” It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which special information is acquired based on what has been done.

Feature D12. It has a specific movable part (specific movable part 341) that is movable between a third position and a fourth position different from the third position, and the specific movable part is movable by moving the specific movable part. A specific production means (specific unit 340) that is more likely to give a result more advantageous to the player than if not,
When it is determined that a predetermined second condition is satisfied within the effective period, the specific effect means control means for controlling the specific effect means (the function of executing the specific movable process in the MPU 152 of the sound lamp control device 92) And a gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D11.

  As in the feature D12, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine provided with specific effect means different from the normal effect means. Here, controlling the specific effect means within the effective period includes starting the movement of the specific effect means within the effective period and ending the movement of the specific effect means after the effective period has elapsed.

  Feature D13. The specific rendering means control means moves the specific rendering means as one of the second conditions when the plurality of normal rendering means are determined not to be movable. Gaming machine.

  Feature D14. When the specific effect means control means determines that the specific effect means control means is moved, the normal effect means control means determines that the specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means after the operation means is operated. The game machine according to Feature D11 or D12, wherein the normal effect means is not moved even when operated.

  According to the features D13 and D14, the normal effect means and the specific effect means do not move simultaneously, and the effect means that the player should pay attention to can be clearly distinguished. Further, in the configuration including the feature D14, when the specific effect means control means determines that the specific effect means is movable, the normal effect means that is not movable when the player operates the operation means is present. It is possible to produce a difference in production (so-called law failure) that the production means is not movable. For this reason, in the process of operating the operation means, the player can also be given a new gameability of searching for an effect (state) that the normal effect means that should be movable does not move, and the player's attention to the game is increased. Can be improved.

  Feature D15. The normal movable part in the normal effect means and the specific movable part in the specific effect means move the normal movable part in the normal effect means to the second position, and the specific movable part in the specific effect means is the fourth position respectively. The gaming machine according to feature D13 or D14, wherein the gaming machine has a shape that contacts when moved to a position.

  When the configuration of the feature D13 or D14 is provided as in the feature D15, the normal effect means and the specific effect means do not move at the same time. Therefore, the normal movable portion of the normal effect means moves to the second position and the specific effect. When the specific movable part of the means is moved to the fourth position, it may be shaped to contact each other. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means can be improved, and the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means can have a novel shape or , It can be a powerful shape.

Feature D16. Specific timing determining means (a function for determining the specific timing of the sound lamp control device 92 (a function for executing the processing of S2805)) for determining a specific timing within the effective period when a predetermined second condition is satisfied. Have
When it is determined that the operating means is operated within the effective period and the specific timing is determined, the normal effect means control means determines that a predetermined third condition is satisfied. The game machine according to any one of the features D1 to D6, wherein the normal effect means is moved so that the movement of the normal effect means ends at the specific timing.

  According to the feature D16, when the specific timing is determined, when the normal performance means determines that the third condition is satisfied, the normal performance means is moved so that the movement of the normal performance means ends at the specific timing. . For this reason, in such a situation, the normal effect means does not move after the specific timing, so that the player can smoothly focus on another effect that starts after the specific timing, and the player's degree of attention to the game Can be improved.

  When the specific timing is determined and the third condition is satisfied, the normal performance means is moved so that the movement ends at the specific timing immediately before the specific timing. For this reason, in such a situation, the normal effect means does not move after the specific timing, so that the player can smoothly focus on another effect that starts after the specific timing, and the player's degree of attention to the game Can be improved.

  Feature D17. The game machine according to Feature D16, wherein the normal effect means control means changes the control of the normal effect means based on a remaining period until the specific timing.

  According to the feature D17, the control of the normal effect means changes based on the remaining period until the specific timing. For this reason, in the process of operating the operation means, the player can be given a new gameability of checking whether or not the specific timing has been determined by paying attention to the movement of the normal effect means. The degree of attention to the game can be improved.

  Feature D18. If the normal effect means control means determines that the first condition is not satisfied, the basic effect period is not more than a period from the time when the operation means is operated to the specific timing. When the means is moved in the first movable mode and it is determined that the first condition is satisfied, the shortened movable period is not longer than the period from the time when the operating means is operated to the specific timing. The game machine according to Feature D17, wherein the effect means is moved in the second movable mode.

  According to the feature D18, just before the specific timing, only the normal effect means whose basic movable period or shortened movable period is shorter than the period until the specific timing is moved. For this reason, in the process of operating the operation means, a new game in which the player guesses whether or not the specific timing has been determined by looking for an effect (state) that the normal effect means that should be movable does not move. Sex can be imparted and the player's attention to the game can be improved.

  Feature D19. The normal effect means control means is a case where it is determined that the first condition is not satisfied, and is in a non-movable state, and the basic movable period is the specific timing from the time when the operating means is operated. If it is determined that there is a normal production means longer than the period until the normal production means is moved in the first special movable period whose movable period is shorter than the basic movable period, and it is determined that the first condition is satisfied. When it is determined that there is a normal effect means that is not movable and the shortened movable period is longer than the period from the time when the operating means is operated to the specific timing, the normal effect means is moved to the shortened movable position. The gaming machine according to Feature D17, wherein the gaming machine is movable in a second special movable period whose movable period is shorter than the period.

  According to the feature D19, immediately before the specific timing, the normal performance means whose basic movable period or shortened movable period is longer than the period until the specific timing is moved in the first special movable period or the second special movable period. For this reason, in the process of operating the operation means, the player can be given a new gameability of inferring whether or not the specific timing has been determined from the movable period of the normal effect means, and the player's game Attention can be improved.

  Feature D20. The normal performance means control means moves the normal performance means by making the movable distance of the normal movable part shorter than the movable distance of the first movable mode, thereby setting the movable period of the normal performance means to the first special The movable period of the normal effector is moved to the second special movable period by moving the normal effector by making the movable distance of the normal movable part shorter than the movable distance of the second movable mode. The gaming machine according to Feature D19, wherein:

  According to the feature D20, since the movable period is shortened by shortening the movable distance, the player can be focused on how to move the normal movable portion (reaching point), and the player's attention to the game is improved. it can.

Feature D21. The normal effect means control means moves the normal effect means by making the moving speed of the normal movable portion faster than the moving speed of the first movable mode, thereby moving the normal effect means in the first special movement period. In addition to the movable period, the normal rendering means is moved by making the movable speed of the normal movable portion faster than the movable speed of the second movable mode, thereby making the movable period of the normal rendering means the second special movable period. The gaming machine according to Feature D19, wherein:

  According to the feature D21, since the movable period is shortened by increasing the movable speed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the moving state (speed) of the normal movable portion, and improve the player's attention to the game. it can.

Feature D22. Special processing period determining means (a function for determining a special processing period in the MPU 152 of the sound lamp control device 92) that determines a predetermined period from the specific timing to a time point before the basic movable period as a special processing period,
When the normal effect means control means determines that the operation means is operated within the special processing period, and determines that the first condition is not satisfied, the basic movable period indicates that the operation means When the first condition is determined to be satisfied by delaying the movement of the normal performance means that is less than the period from the time point when the operation is performed to the specific timing, the operation means operates the reduced movement period. By delaying the movement of the normal effect means that is less than the period from the point in time to the specific timing, the delayed movement end time of the normal effect means matches the specific timing. A gaming machine according to D17.

  According to the feature D22, the movement of the normal effect means is delayed immediately before the specific timing. For this reason, in the process of operating the operation means, the player is inferred whether or not the specific timing has been determined by searching for whether or not the normal performance means is moved after the operation means is operated. Gameability can be imparted, and the player's attention to the game can be improved. Further, in the feature D22, since the movable end point of the normal effect means is made coincident with the specific timing, the player can be more smoothly focused on another effect started after the specific timing.

Feature D23. It has a specific movable part (specific movable part 341) that is movable between a third position and a fourth position different from the third position, and the specific movable part is movable by moving the specific movable part. A specific production means (specific unit 340) that is more likely to give a result more advantageous to the player than if not,
When it is determined that the predetermined fourth condition is satisfied within the effective period, the specific effect means control means for controlling the specific effect means (specific movable processing in the MPU 152 of the sound lamp control device 92 is executed) Function), and
The gaming machine according to any one of features D16 to D22, wherein the specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means after the specific timing.

  According to the feature D23, as another effect that starts after the specific timing, a specific effect means that is likely to give a result advantageous to the player is moved. For this reason, the movement of the normal effect means is completed by the specific timing, so that the player can smoothly focus on the specific effect means. Here, controlling the specific effect means within the effective period includes starting the movement of the specific effect means within the effective period and ending the movement of the specific effect means after the effective period has elapsed.

  Feature D24. The normal movable part in the normal effect means and the specific movable part in the specific effect means are such that the normal movable part in the normal effect means moves to the second position and the specific movable part in the specific effect means reaches the fourth position. The gaming machine according to Feature D23, wherein the gaming machine has a shape that contacts when moved.

  When the configuration of the feature D23 is provided as in the feature D24, since the normal effect means and the specific effect means do not move at the same time within the effective period, the normal movable portion of the normal effect means moves to the second position, It can also be made into the shape which contacts mutually when the specific movable part of a specific production | presentation means moves to a 4th position. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means can be improved, and the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means can have a novel shape or , It can be a powerful shape.

  Feature D25. The specific presentation means control means moves the specific presentation means when it is determined that the operation means is operated after the specific timing within the effective period, as described in the feature D23 or D24. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D25, when a configuration such as the feature D17 is provided, the player who notices that the movement of the normal effect means has changed because the specific timing is set, and that the specific effect means moves thereafter. The operating means can be operated in a state understood only by itself. For this reason, it is possible to further improve the degree of attention of the player to the normal performance means.

  Feature D26. The game machine according to Feature D23 or D24, wherein the specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means at the specific timing.

  According to the feature D26, when a configuration such as the feature D17 is provided, a player who notices that the movement of the normal performance means has changed because the specific timing is set, and that the specific performance means moves thereafter. It is possible to wait for a specific timing to be reached in a state understood only by itself. For this reason, it is possible to further improve the degree of attention of the player to the normal performance means.

Feature D27. A specific effect means movement determining means (moving a specific unit of the sound lamp control device 92) that determines whether or not to move the specific effect means when the operation means is operated within the effective period and before the specific timing. A function to execute a lottery process)
The specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means when one of the fourth conditions is determined to move the specific effect means by the specific effect means movement determining means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D23 to D26.

  According to the feature D27, it is determined whether or not to operate the specific effect means when the operation means is operated by the player. That is, even if the specific timing is determined, the specific effect means does not move if the player does not operate the operation means. For this reason, it can suppress that a player's interest in operating the operation means falls.

Feature D28. It has a specific movable part (specific movable part 341) that is movable between a third position and a fourth position different from the third position, and the specific movable part is movable by moving the specific movable part. A specific production means (specific unit 340) that is more likely to give a result more advantageous to the player than if not,
When it is determined that a predetermined second condition has been established, a specific effect means control means for controlling the specific effect means (a function of executing a specific movable process in the MPU 152 of the audio lamp control device 92),
A plurality of the normal effect means are provided, and the at least one normal effect means has the basic movable period longer than the basic movable period of the other normal effect means and the shortened movable period of the other normal effect means. It is made longer than the shortened movable period of the production means,
As one of the second conditions, the specific effect means control means is configured such that at least a part of the normal movable parts of the plurality of normal effect means having different basic movable periods move simultaneously within the effective period. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein when it is determined that the predetermined position is reached, the specific effect means is moved.

  According to the feature D28, as one of the second conditions, the specific effect means that is easy to give a result advantageous to the player when the movement of a part of the plurality of normal effect means is finished at the same time (it is easy to be a hit result). Move. For this reason, the player can be made to actively operate the operation means, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, in such a configuration, the player can operate the operation means while expecting that at least a part of the normal movable parts of the normal effect means will reach a predetermined location at the same time accidentally. It is also possible to change the timing at which the operating means is operated so that at least some of the normal moving parts of the normal rendering means reach a predetermined location simultaneously. For this reason, even in the process of operating the operating means to the player, different game characteristics can be imparted, and the player can select how to operate the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  The term “simultaneous” here includes a slight difference that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable, in addition to the case where the normal movable part of the normal production means reaches the predetermined location completely simultaneously. Further, controlling the specific effect means within the effective period here includes starting the movement of the specific effect means within the effective period and ending the movement of the specific effect means after the effective period has elapsed.

  Feature D29. The specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means when it is determined that the normal movable parts of the plurality of normal effect means simultaneously reach the first positions, respectively. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D29, the specific effect means moves when the normal movable parts of the plurality of normal effect means reach the respective first positions at the same time. For this reason, it is possible to make the player more impressed with the movement of the specific effect means, and the movement of the specific effect means can be more powerful (exhilarating), and the player can move the specific effect means. The expectation for can be improved.

  Feature D30. The normal movable part in the normal effect means and the specific movable part in the specific effect means move the normal movable part in the normal effect means to the second position, and the specific movable part in the specific effect means is the fourth position. The gaming machine according to Feature D29, wherein the gaming machine has a shape that contacts when moved to the position.

  According to the feature D30, since the configuration of the feature D29 is provided and the normal effect means and the specific effect means do not move at the same time, the normal movable part of the normal effect means moves to the second position and the specific effect means is specified. When the movable part is moved to the fourth position, it may be shaped to contact each other. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means can be improved, and the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means can have a novel shape or , It can be a powerful shape.

  Feature D31. The specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means when it is determined that the normal movable parts of the plurality of normal effect means simultaneously reach the second positions, respectively. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D31, the specific effect means moves when it is determined that the normal movable parts of the plurality of normal effect means reach the second positions at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful effect produced by the simultaneous movement of the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means, and expectation that the player's specific effect means will move. The feeling can be improved.

  Feature D32. The normal movable part in the normal effect means and the specific movable part in the specific effect means move the normal movable part in the normal effect means to the second position, and the specific movable part in the specific effect means is the fourth position. The gaming machine according to Feature D31, wherein the gaming machine has a shape that does not come into contact when moved to.

  According to the feature D32, when the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means move, it can be suppressed that the movable parts come into contact with each other, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.

  Feature D33. When the specific effect means control means determines that the specific effect means control means is moved, the normal effect means control means determines that the specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means after the operation means is operated. The gaming machine according to any one of features D28 to D32, wherein the normal performance means is not moved even when operated.

  According to the feature D33, when the configuration such as the feature D29 is provided, the normal effect means and the specific effect means are difficult to move simultaneously, and the effect means that the player should pay attention to can be clearly distinguished. In addition, in the case where the configurations of the features D29 and D31 are provided, it is possible to suppress an uncomfortable feeling in the production that the normal production means starts moving after the specific production means is moved.

  Further, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the gaming machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine (game machine), 54 ... First start port, 55 ... Second start port, 80 ... Symbol display device, 91 ... Main control device, 92 ... Audio lamp control device, 93 ... Display control device, 112 ... MPU (main MPU), 113 ROM (main ROM), 114 RAM (main RAM), 152 MPU (audio MPU), 153 ROM (audio ROM), 154 RAM (audio RAM) ) 154c ... Production unit operation effective period timer counter area, 154d ... Various production unit movable period timer counter area, 162 ... MPU (display side MPU), 163 ... Program ROM, 164 ... Work RAM, 165 ... VDP, 310 ... 1 effect unit, 320 ... 2nd effect unit, 330 ... 3rd effect unit, 340 ... specific unit.

Claims (1)

Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Operation detecting means for detecting presence or absence of operation of the operating means;
Normal production means having a normal movable part movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position;
Based on the detection result of the operation detection means, normal effect means control means for controlling the normal effect means,
In a gaming machine comprising an effective period determining means for determining an effective period of the operating means,
Specific timing determining means for determining a specific timing within the effective period when it is determined that a predetermined first condition is established;
When it is determined that the operation means is operated within the effective period and the specific timing is determined, the normal effect means control means determines that a predetermined second condition is satisfied. The game machine is characterized in that the normal performance means is moved so that the movement of the normal performance means ends at the specific timing.

Images